JP8000
Operating Instructions
ZDCH040E-1.eps
Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future
reference.
For safety, please follow the instructions in this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To get
maximum versatility from this machine all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in
this manual. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Please read the Safety Information before using this machine. It contains important information related
to USER SAFETY and PREVENTING EQUIPMENT PROBLEMS.
Notes:
Some illustrations might be slightly different from your machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good print quality, Ricoh recommends that you use genuine Ricoh master and ink.
Ricoh shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts other
than genuine Ricoh parts in your Ricoh office product.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 2.5A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
⇒ P.194 “Power Connection”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-
ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television re-
ception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Copyright © 2000 Ricoh Co., Ltd.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information
When using your equipment, the following safety precautions should always be
followed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-
tension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock, do not remove any covers or
screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following conditions exists:
• You spill something into the equipment.
• You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.
• Your equipment's cover has been damaged.
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R CAUTION:
• Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the equipment.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.
• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach inside the
machine to remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-
able at an authorized dealer.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-
scribed in the Safety Information section.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating the machine.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-
eration.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Prints
Before making prints using this ma-
chine, you have to make a master by
pressing the {Start} key. When you
press the {Start} key, the machine
scans the original image and makes a
master. This procedure describes
how to make basic prints.
B Press the {Start} key.
A Place your originals in one of the
following two ways:
Placing originals on the exposure
glass
C Press the {Proof} key.
A Place a single page face down.
Check the print image.
ZDCH110E
Reference
For changing the image posi-
tion, ⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the Posi-
tion of Printed Images”.
Inserting originals in the optional
document feeder
A Insert a stack of originals face
up.
To increase the image density,
press the {W} key. ⇒ P.24 “Ad-
justing the Image Density of
Prints”.
ZDCH120E
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To decrease the image density,
press the {V} key. ⇒ P.24 “Ad-
justing the Image Density of
Prints”.
D Enter the desired number of
prints with the number keys.
E Press the {Print} key.
When the print job has finished,
press the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-
er} key. Previously entered job set-
tings will be cleared.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What You Can do with this Machine
Below is a quick summary of this ma-
chine's features and where to look in
this manual for more information.
❖ Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset
Ratios
⇒ P.28 “Reducing and Enlarging Us-
ing Preset Ratios”.
⇒ P.19 “Standard Printing”.
❖ Adjusting the Print Image Position
⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the Position of
Printed Images”.
GRRATI0E
❖ Auto Magnification
⇒ P.30 “Auto Magnification”.
GRAUTO0E
❖ Adjusting the Print Image Density
of Prints”.
❖ Zoom
⇒ P.33 “Zoom”.
❖ Tint Mode
⇒ P.25 “Tint Mode”.
GRZOOM0E
GRTINT0E
❖ Changing the Printing Speed
⇒ P.26 “Changing the Printing
Speed”.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Directional Magnification (%)
⇒ P.35 “Directional Magnification
(%)”.
❖
Auto Cycle
⇒ P.49 “Auto Cycle”.
❖ All Class Mode
⇒ P.50 “All Class Mode”.
a%
b%
CP2P01EE
GRCLAS2E
❖ Directional Magnification (Size)
⇒ P.37 “Directional Magnification
(Size)”.
❖ Auto Class Mode
⇒ P.52 “Auto Class Mode”.
1
3
2
4
GRCLAS2E
CP2M01EE
❖ Erasing Center and Edge Margins
Margins”.
❖ Manual Class Mode
⇒ P.55 “Manual Class Mode with
One Original”.
❖ Edge Erase
⇒ P.40 “Edge Erase”.
A
B
A
B
GRERAS0E
GRCLAS2E
❖ Printing on Various Kinds of Paper
of Paper”.
⇒ P.44 “Selecting Original Modes”.
❖ Economy Mode
⇒ P.48 “Economy Mode”.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Manual Class Mode with 2 or More
Originals
❖
⇒ P.68 “Skip Feed Printing”.
⇒ P.57 “Manual Class Mode with 2
or More Originals”.
❖ Programs
⇒ P.70 “Programs”.
⇒ P.73 “Security Mode”.
A B
C D
A
B
⇒ P.74 “Quality Start Mode”.
C
D
❖ Job Separation
⇒ P.76 “Job Separation”.
GRCLAS1E
❖ Class Mode
⇒ P.59 “Class Mode”.
R R R
R
GRJOBS0E
R R R
⇒ P.78 “Conserving the Master”.
GRCLAS0E
⇒ P.79 “On Line Printing”.
❖ Combining Originals
⇒ P.61 “Combine Originals”.
⇒ P.128 “Making Color Prints”.
1 2
1 2
❖ Printing in Two Colors
⇒ P.130 “Printing in Two Colors”.
GRCOMB2E
R
R
P
❖ Auto Combine Mode
⇒ P.66 “Auto Combine Mode”.
P
GRCOLO0E
1
1 1
❖ Image Rotation
⇒ P.81 “Image Rotation”.
❖ Make-up Printing
⇒ P.93 “Make-up Printing”.
GRACOM0E
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Merging Images
⇒ P.104 “Image Overlay”.
❖
Stamp
⇒ P.112 “Stamp”.
Priority
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
R
R
Preliminary
GRSTAM0E
GROVER0E
❖ Memory Combine
⇒ P.114 “Memory Combine”.
R
1
2
3
4
1
3
2
4
GROVER1E
❖ Data Stamp
⇒ P.107 “Date Stamp”.
GRMCOM0E
GRREPE0E
ZDZX010E
❖ Original Storage
⇒ P.99 “Original Storage”.
❖ Page Stamp
⇒ P.109 “Page Stamp”.
1
5
– 1 –
GRPAGE0E
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Storage Overlay
⇒ P.104 “Image Overlay”.
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
GROVER0E
R
R
R
GROVER1E
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Machine Exterior........................................................................................ 1
Machine Interior......................................................................................... 2
Options....................................................................................................... 4
Operation Panel......................................................................................... 5
Keys .............................................................................................................. 5
Panel Display............................................................................................. 8
Panel Display Layout .................................................................................... 9
Print Paper ............................................................................................... 11
Originals................................................................................................... 13
Printing Preparations.............................................................................. 15
Loading Paper............................................................................................. 15
Setting Up The Paper Delivery Tray ........................................................... 16
Standard Printing .................................................................................... 19
Removing Prints.......................................................................................... 21
Energy Saver Mode................................................................................. 22
Before Making a Master.............................................................................. 24
After Making a Master................................................................................. 24
Tint Mode.................................................................................................. 25
Stopping a Multi-print Run to Print Another Original ................................... 27
Auto Magnification .................................................................................. 30
Directional Magnification (Size) ............................................................. 37
Erasing Center and Edge Margins......................................................... 39
Edge Erase............................................................................................... 40
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing onto Thick Paper............................................................................ 41
Printing onto Standard Paper...................................................................... 41
Printing onto Envelopes .............................................................................. 41
Letter/Photo Mode Printing ......................................................................... 44
Photo Mode Printing.................................................................................... 45
Pencil Mode Printing ................................................................................... 47
Economy Mode........................................................................................ 48
Auto Cycle................................................................................................ 49
All Class Mode......................................................................................... 50
Auto Class Mode ..................................................................................... 52
Class Mode............................................................................................... 59
Combine Originals................................................................................... 61
Auto Combine Mode................................................................................ 66
Skip Feed Printing................................................................................... 68
Storing a Program....................................................................................... 70
Protecting a Program .................................................................................. 71
Recalling a Program.................................................................................... 72
Security Mode.......................................................................................... 73
Quality Start Mode................................................................................... 74
Using Quality Start Manually....................................................................... 75
Job Separation......................................................................................... 76
Conserving the Master............................................................................ 78
On Line Printing....................................................................................... 79
Auto On Line ............................................................................................... 80
Image Rotation......................................................................................... 81
Main Features ............................................................................................. 82
Background Patterns................................................................................... 85
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing................................................ 86
Command Sheets ....................................................................................... 86
Making a Command Sheet.......................................................................... 86
Command Sheets and Finished Prints........................................................ 92
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing ..................................................................................... 93
Make-up Samples.................................................................................... 96
Original Storage....................................................................................... 99
Storing Original ........................................................................................... 99
Selecting Stored Original .......................................................................... 101
Protecting Stored Original......................................................................... 101
Deleting Stored Original............................................................................ 102
Image Overlay........................................................................................ 104
Storage overlay......................................................................................... 104
On Line overlay......................................................................................... 105
Overlay.Format ......................................................................................... 105
Page Stamp............................................................................................ 109
Stamp...................................................................................................... 112
Memory Combine .................................................................................. 114
Combining Several Single–sided Originals onto one Single–sided Print ... 115
Originals.................................................................................................... 123
Making Color Prints................................................................................... 128
Printing in Two Colors............................................................................... 130
Printing Area (At 23°C/73°F, 65% RH)...................................................... 132
Master Cut Length..................................................................................... 132
3.Combination Chart
Combination Chart ................................................................................ 133
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu.................................................................................... 137
1. System .................................................................................................. 137
2. Set Operat'n Mode ................................................................................ 139
3. Initial Setting.......................................................................................... 140
4. Mode Setting......................................................................................... 142
5. Stamp.................................................................................................... 146
6. Administrator Mode............................................................................... 148
7. On Line Mode........................................................................................ 149
1-6 Time Setting........................................................................................ 150
3-4 Reproduction Ratio ............................................................................. 150
3-5 Class Enter No.................................................................................... 151
3-11 Margin Erase Area............................................................................ 152
4-11 No. of Skip Feed ............................................................................... 153
4-14 No. of Q.start..................................................................................... 154
4-19 Type of Paper ................................................................................... 155
5-4 Stamp Position.................................................................................... 156
5-7 Position (Date) .................................................................................... 157
5-10 Position (Page) ................................................................................. 158
5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern............................................................................ 159
6-1 Check Counter.................................................................................... 160
6-2 Reset Counters................................................................................... 161
6-5 Chg. User Code .................................................................................. 162
6-6 Del. User Code ................................................................................... 162
Combine Originals Mode........................................................................... 167
Loading Paper........................................................................................ 168
x Clearing Misfeeds............................................................................. 169
”x + E” Master Misfeeds in the Master Eject Section .............................. 176
”x
+ P” Original Misfeeds Occur When Using the Optional Document Feeder... 177
When the Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M) Lights................................ 179
When the Add Ink Indicator (j) Lights............................................... 180
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Poor Printing.......................................................................................... 187
Black Lines/Stained Prints ........................................................................ 190
Faint Prints................................................................................................ 190
Do's and Don'ts ..................................................................................... 191
Environment.............................................................................................. 193
Power Connection..................................................................................... 194
Machine Clearance ................................................................................... 194
Cleaning the Main Frame.......................................................................... 195
Main Frame............................................................................................. 197
Document Feeder (Option) ................................................................... 201
Twin Color Press Roller Printing System TC-II (Option).................... 202
Consumables......................................................................................... 203
INDEX...................................................................................................... 204
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Machine Exterior
ZDCH040E-2
1. Front door
Open to access the inside of the machine.
6. Paper feed side plates
Prevent paper being fed skewed.
2. Flip up cover
Flip up to access the keys underneath.
7. Paper feed tray
Set paper here.
3. Operation panel
⇒ P.5 “Operation Panel”.
8. Paper feed side plates knob
Use to move the side plates.
4. Master tray
Open this unit when installing the mas-
ter.
9. Paper feed side plates knob lock
lever
Fix to the paper feed side plates knob.
5. Paper feed tray down key
Press to lower the Paper feed tray.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Machine Interior
3
4
ZBHH180E
14
1. Main switch
Use to turn the power on or off.
5. Paper delivery tray
Completed prints are delivered here.
2. Paper alignment wings
Lift or lower the wings depending on the
type of paper being used.
6. Paper delivery side plates
These plates align the prints on the paper
delivery tray.
3. Paper delivery end plate
7. Paper delivery side plate knobs
This plate aligns the leading edge of
prints.
Use to move the side plates.
8. Handle E1
Use to pull out the master eject unit.
4. Paper delivery end plate knob
Use to move the end plate.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Ink holder
Set the ink cartridge in this holder.
10. Drum unit lock lever B1
Lower to unlock and pull out the drum
unit.
11. Drum unit
The master is wrapped around this unit.
12. Exposure glass
Position originals here face down for
printing.
13. Platen cover or document feeder
(option)
Lower this cover over an original on the
exposure glass.
14. Trailing edge guides
Swing out these guides when you use A4,
81/2" × 11"KL paper.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Panel
Keys
Auto On Line
lay
Original Storage
ZDZS200N
1. {Quality Start} key
9. {Image Density} key
⇒ P.74 “Quality Start Mode”.
Prints”.
⇒ P.73 “Security Mode”.
10. {Economy Mode} key
3. {Skip Feed} key
Press to select skip feed printing. ⇒ P.68
Mode”.
“Skip Feed Printing”.
Press to select the Original Storage func-
4. {User Tools} key
⇒ P.79 “On Line Printing”
5. {Stamp} key
Press to select the Stamp mode. ⇒ P.107
P.112 “Stamp”.
⇒ P.79 “On Line Printing”.
6. {Make-Up} key
“Make-up Printing”.
7. {Overlay} key
⇒ P.104 “Image Overlay”.
Press to combine originals onto 1 print.
⇒ P.61 “Combine Originals”, ⇒ P.114
“Memory Combine”, ⇒ P.66 “Auto Com-
bine Mode”.
8. {Edge Erase} key
Press to select Edge Erase mode. ⇒ P.40
“Edge Erase”.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. {
Class Mode”, ⇒ P.52 “Auto Class Mode”, ⇒
P.55 “Manual Class Mode with One Origi-
17. {W} {V} keys (Speed keys)
Press to adjust the printing speed. ⇒ P.24
18. {~}{}}{|}{{} keys
Press to shift the image forward, back-
ward, right, or left. ⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
select on the panel display.
19. {Program} key
Press to enter or recall programs. ⇒ P.70
“Programs”.
20. Number keys
Press to enter the desired number of
prints and data for selected modes.
21. {Clear/Stop} key
Press to stop printing.
22. {q} key
Use to enter data in selected modes.
23. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key
Press to clear any previously entered job
settings.
24. {Start} key
25. {Auto Cycle} key
Use to process the master and make
prints in one operation. ⇒ P.49 “Auto Cy-
cle”.
26. {Proof} key
Press to make proof prints.
27. {Print} key
Press to start printing.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicators
Auto On Line
Original Storage
ZDZS210N
1. Special feature indicator
4. A4, 81/2" × 11" drum indicator
Lights to indicate that special features
have been selected. To access the special
features, lift up the cover on the left side
of the operation panel.
Lights when the A4, 81/2" × 11" drum unit
Lights when the color drum unit is in-
stalled. ⇒ P.128 “Color Printing Using the
Optional Color Drum”.
These indicators light to inform you of
the status of the machine. ⇒ P.165 “If
Your Machine does not Operate as You
Want”.
While printing, it shows the number of
prints remaining.
3. A3/11" × 17" drum indicator
Lights when the A3, 11" × 17" drum unit
is installed. ⇒ P.132 “Changing the Drum
Size”.
7. Panel display
⇒ P.8 “Panel Display”.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Display
The panel display shows the machine status, error messages, and function
menus.
ZBZX170N
1. Items for the selected function.
3. Machine status or messages.
2. These keys correspond to the se-
lectable items shown above them on
the panel display. To select an item
shown on the panel display, press
the key directly below it.
4. Items which can be selected.
Important
❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30N or more to the panel dis-
play or it could be damaged.
Note
Auto
❒ When you select an item on the panel display, it is highlighted (e.g.
).
OK
Items shown grayed-out (e.g.
) cannot be selected.
❒ Common panel display items:
[OK]
Confirm a function selection or enters a value.
[Cancel]
Cancel a function selection or entered value and returns to
the previous display.
[Prev.][Next]
When there are too many items to fit on the panel display, use
these keys to move between pages.
{~}{}}{|}{{}[←][→]
Press to highlight items you wish to select on the panel dis-
play.
[Select]
Selects a value.
[Exit]
Returns to the previous display.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Display Layout
The basic elements used on the panel display are shown below. Understanding
their meaning helps you use this machine's features quickly and easily.
❖ Sample display when selecting the [Original] key
ZBZX180N
1. Machine status or message.
2. Available functions.
3. Illustrations of displays in this
manual show the next key to be
pressed whitened out.
E.g. kmeans “Press the [Original] key”.
1
TPES510E
2
3
1. Available functions.
2. Cancels the settings and returns
to the previous display.
3. Confirms the settings.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Operation
Print Paper
The following limitations apply:
Paper Size
Inch
Paper
Weight
Metric
17" L, 81/2"
11" LK, 51/2" 81/2"
×
14"
×
L,
Paper feed tray A3 L, B4 L, A4 L K, B5 L K,
A5 L, B6 L, A6 L, Others (Ver-
tical: 70 - 297mm, Horizontal: 148
- 432mm)
47.1 - 209.3g/
m2, 12.5 - 55.6
lb
11"
×
81/2"
×
LK, Others (Vertical: 2.76" -
11.7", Horizontal: 5.83" - 17")
Non-recommended paper:
• Roughly cut paper
• Paper of different thickness in the same stack
• Envelopes heavier than 85g/m2, 22 lb.
• Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper
• Torn paper
• Slippery paper
• Rough paper
• Paper with any kind of coating (such as carbon)
• Short grain paper
• Thin paper that has low stiffness
• Paper that is prone to generate a lot of paper dust
• Grained paper loaded with the direction of the grain perpendicular to the
feed direction
• Certain types of long thin envelopes e.g. international mail envelopes
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
• The following types of envelopes:
1
If you print on rough grained paper, the copy image might be blurred.
You can use A3 (297 × 420mm) or 11" × 17" originals or printing paper. When you
want to print the entire image of an A3, 11" × 17" original, select Reduce mode
because the maximum print areas are as follows:
• Metric version: 290 × 409mm, 11.4" × 16.1"
• Inch version: 290 × 419mm, 11.4" × 16.4"
When you use A3, 11" × 17" and 209.3g/m2, 55.6 lb paper, slow the printing
speed down to setting 1, 2, or 3.
Important
❒ Correct curls in the paper before placing it in the machine. When you cannot
correct the paper curl, stack the paper with the curl face down or face up as
shown in the illustration. If paper is curled, it might wrap around the drum
or stains might appear.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Originals
Originals
The machine can detect the following original sizes placed on the exposure glass:
Metric version
Inch version
1
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
If the machine cannot detect the original sizes properly, select the area to copy
with the {Edge Erase} key. ⇒ P.40 “Edge Erase”. The machine may not detect the
original size properly when:
• Originals contain index tabs.
• Originals are OHP transparencies or are translucent.
• Originals are dark.
• Originals contain solid images.
• Originals are of sizes other than those listed above.
If you do not lift the platen cover more than 30cm, 12" when you place another
original, the machine might not detect the next original size correctly.
The maximum original size you can place on the exposure glass is 304.8 ×
432mm, 12" × 17".
If you use originals that have bold letters or solid images at the leading edges,
you might get prints with dirty edges. In this case, place the original face down
with the widest margin toward the paper delivery tray or raise the printing
speed.
Place originals after correction fluid and ink have completely dried. Not taking
this precaution could mark the exposure glass and cause marks to be printed.
In most situations, place originals as shown below.
R R
R
R
ZDZX030E
When the original is placed in a direction that differs from the print paper, the
machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the print paper
direction.
The first 8mm, 0.32", of the leading edge and the last 2mm, 0.08", of the trailing
edge cannot be printed. Make sure the leading edge margin is at least 8mm,
0.32", and the trailing edge margin is at least 2mm, 0.08".
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Original
Print
a
1
a = 8mm, 0.32"
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Preparations
Printing Preparations
C Make sure that the paper feed
side plates knob lock lever is
raised (lock is released), and then
grasp the paper feed side plates
knob and adjust the paper feed
side plates to match the paper
size.
Loading Paper
1
A Carefully open the paper feed
tray.
ZDCY130E
ZDCY011E
B Lift the paper feed side plates.
Important
❒ Always adjust the position with
the lock lever for the paper feed
side plates in the raised position
(lock released).
D Place the paper on the paper feed
tray.
ZDCH050E
Note
❒ When loading larger paper,
slide out the extender.
TPEY040E
Note
❒ Correct the paper curl before
curl face down.
Reference
⇒ P.11 “Print Paper”
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
E Make sure that the paper feed
side plates are touching both
sides of the paper, and then push
the lock lever for the side plates
down to lock the side plates into
position.
Setting Up The Paper Delivery
Tray
1
A Raise the paper delivery tray
slightly, and then gently lower it
with your hand.
ZDCY041
ZBHH050E
B Raise each paper delivery side
plate, and then grasp the side
plate knobs and move the paper
delivery side plates to match the
print paper size.
Important
❒ Always make sure that you
push the lock lever for the side
plates down to lock the side
plates into position.
Note
❒ Make sure that the paper size
and direction in the panel dis-
play correspond with the actual
paper size and direction set on
the paper feed tray.
ZDZH180E
Note
❒ The inside of the plates should
align with the paper size.
When you use thick paper (128 g/
m2 to 209.3 g/m2, 34 lb to 55.6 lb)
A Adjust the side plates to match
the paper size scale on the
main frame side.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Preparations
When you use standard paper
(47.1 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 12.5 lb to
28 lb)
When you use 81.4 g/m2, 21.6 lb
or thinner and A4, 81/2 × 11" or
larger paper
A Adjust the side plates to match
the paper size scale on the end
plate side.
A Lift the paper alignment wings.
1
When you use A4, 8 1/2" × 11"
KL paper
C Lower or lift the paper alignment
wings by turning the left and
right knobs.
A Swing out the guides as shown
in the illustration.
ZDZY020E
Note
D Turn on the main switch.
❒ When the guides are up, you
might not be able to load the
unit to full capacity (1,000
sheets) depending on the paper
you are using.
❒ Lift the paper alignment wings
when B5L prints are curled.
When you use 81.4 g/m2, 21.6 lb
or thicker paper
TPEH021E
Note
A Lower the paper alignment
are left when you switch it on.
See “User Tools—Ink/Master
Left” in ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
wings.
When you use 81.4 g/m2, 21.6 lb
or thinner and B5 or smaller
paper
A Lower the paper alignment
wings.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Entering a User Code to Use the Machine
If user codes are turned on, operators
B Press the {q} key.
must enter their user code before they
1
can use the machine. The machine
keeps count of the number of copies
made under each user code.
Note
❒ If you want to use this feature, you
must turn it on and register the
can register up to 20 user codes.
See “Set User Code” and “Reg.
User Code” ⇒ P.148 “6. Adminis-
C Make your prints.
trator Mode”.
D To prevent others from making
prints with your user code, hold
down the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-
er} key, and then press the {Clear/
Stop} key.
❒ When user codes are turned on,
the machine will prompt you for
your user code when you turn on
the main switch or after the ma-
chine has been reset.
A Enter your 4–digit user code with
the number keys.
Note
❒ User codes are not displayed on
the panel display.
❒ To change the number entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new number.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Printing
Standard Printing
A Make sure that the machine is E Place the original face down on
ready for printing.
the exposure glass. The original
should be aligned to the rear left
corner.
1
B If user codes are turned on, enter
Reference
⇒ P.18 “Entering a User Code to
Use the Machine”
ZDCH110E
C Make sure that there are no previ-
F Lower the platen cover.
G Make your desired settings.
H Press the {Start} key.
ous settings remaining.
Note
❒ To clear any previous settings,
press the {Clear Modes/Energy
Saver} key.
D Lift the platen cover.
A trial print is delivered to the pa-
per delivery tray.
TPEH010E
Note
❒ Be sure to lift the platen cover
more than 30cm, 12".
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
I Press the {Proof} key and check K Press the {Print} key.
the image density and the image
position of the proof print.
1
Note
❒ To stop the machine during a
multi-print run, press the {Clear/
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. ⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Stop} key.
❒ To return the machine to the ini-
tial condition after printing, and
then press the {Clear Modes/Ener-
gy Saver} key.
dark or light, adjust the image
density using the {W}{V} keys.
⇒ P.24 “Adjusting the Image
Density of Prints”.
J Enter the number of prints re-
quired with the number keys.
Note
❒ To change the number entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new number.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Printing
Removing Prints
A Pull the front paper delivery side
plate down towards you to open
it.
1
Note
❒ You cannot open the rear paper
delivery side plate.
B Remove the prints from the paper
delivery tray and close the paper
delivery side plate.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Energy Saver Mode
If you do not operate the machine for a certain period the machine can enter
Quality Standby mode to remove ink from inside the ink drum. The machine can
then enter Energy Saver mode.
1
You can press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to cancel Energy Saver mode
and the machine returns to the ready condition.
If you press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key for more than three seconds, the
machine will enter Quality Standby mode to remove ink from inside the ink
drum then it will enter Energy Saver mode.
It reduces recovery time from Energy Saver mode.
Energy Saver mode uses less electricity.
Note
by mode. ⇒ P.22 “Energy Saver Mode”.
❒ Quality Standby mode lasts for a few seconds.
❒ You can change the time the machine waits before Energy Saver mode starts.
⇒ P.22 “Energy Saver Mode”.
❒ The machine will not automatically enter Energy Saver mode in the following
cases:
• If there is no ink
• If the originals or paper are jammed
• If the machine is making master or printing
• If the machine is printing the second page of a combined print job
• If the machine is loading original images in memory
• If there is no paper
• If there is no master
• If the paper delivery box is full
• If there are originals still on the machine
• If the cover open message is displayed
• If the settings have been reset to their defaults
• If the User Code entry screen is displayed
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Position of Printed Images
Adjusting the Position of Printed Images
Use the following procedure to adjust
B Adjust image position using the
the position of print images as re-
{~}, {}}, {|}, and {{} keys.
quired.
1
GRPOSI0E
Note
*: Paper feed direction
❒ When you shift the image for-
wards, leave a 10mm, 0.4" mar-
gin at the leading edge. If there
is no margin, paper might wrap
around the drum and cause a
misfeed.
Limitation
❒ For 308 mm, 12.2"-width paper,
you can only adjust the position of
the print image 5 mm, 0.2" up or
down.
❒ The {~} and {}} keys shift the
image up to 15mm, 0.6" each
way in 0.5mm, 0.02" steps.
Note
❒ When the main switch is turned
off, the position returns to the de-
fault.
❒ The {|} and {{} keys shift the
image up to 10mm, 0.4" each
way in 0.5mm, 0.02" steps.
A Press the [Image =] key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Press the {Proof} key to check the
image position.
Note
❒ You can skip step A and adjust
the image position directly by
pressing the {~}, {}}, {|}, and
{{} keys.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Adjusting the Image Density of Prints
There are two ways to adjust the im-
age density of prints:
After Making a Master
1
❖ Before making a master
Use the {Image Density} key.
A To increase the image density,
press the {W} key. To reduce the
image density, press the {V} key.
❖ After making a master
Use the {W}{V} (Speed) keys.
Before Making a Master
A Press the {Image Density} key to
adjust the image density.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Note
❒ The faster the printing speed be-
comes, the lighter the printing
density is. If you want darker
prints, decrease the printing
speed.
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS010N
B Press the {Start} key.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Changing the Printing Speed
Use the {W} or {V} key to adjust the
printing speed. The relationship be-
tween printing speed and print quali-
ty depends on the type of paper you
use.
1
A Press the {V} key to increase the
speed and press the {W} key to re-
duce the speed.
Note
❒ The following speeds are avail-
able:
• Setting 1:
60 sheets/minute
• Setting 2:
75 sheets/minute
• Setting 3 (default):
90 sheets/minute
• Setting 4:
105 sheets/minute
• Setting 5:
120 sheets/minute
❒ The faster the printing speed be-
comes, the lighter the printing
density is, and vice versa.
❒ When the machine is used in
low temperature conditions, the
image density might decrease.
In this case, slow the printing
speed down to setting 1 or 2.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping a Multi-print Run
Stopping a Multi-print Run
Stopping a Multi-print Run to
Print Another Original
Changing the Number of
Prints Entered and Checking
Completed Prints
1
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
B Set the original.
B Change the number of prints or
C Enter the number of prints and
check the completed prints.
press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ To change the number of prints,
press the {Clear/Stop} key, and
then re-enter the number of
prints with the number keys.
C Press the {Print} key.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset
Ratios
1
Use this function to have originals re-
duced or enlarged by a preset ratio. A
total of 7 ratios are available (3 en-
largement ratios, 4 reduction ratios).
❒ You can select a ratio regardless of
the size of an original or printing
paper. With some ratios, parts of
the image might not be printed or
❒ You can change the preset repro-
duction ratios with the user tools.
See “Reproduction Ratio” ⇒ P.150
“3-4 Reproduction Ratio”.
❒ Prints can be reduced or enlarged
as follows:
GRRATI0E
❖ Metric version
Ratio (%) Original → Print paper size
Note
141
122
115
93
A4 → A3, A5 → A4, B5 → B4
A4 → B4, A5 → B5
B4 → A3, B5 → A4
—
❒ The leading edge of the print im-
age does not shift when a print im-
age is made with this function.
87
A3 → B4, A4 → B5
B4 → A4, B5 → A5
A3 → A4, A4 → A5, B4 → B5
82
71
❖ Inch version
Ratio (%) Original → Print paper size
5 1/2" × 8 1/2" → 8 1/2" × 14"
155
8 1/2"
8 1/2"
×
11"
→
→
11"
×
17", 5 1/2"
11"
129
×
8 1/2"
×
8 1/2" × 14" → 11" × 17"
—
121
1. Place on the exposure glass
93
77
2. Place in the optional document
feeder
8 1/2" × 14" → 8 1/2" × 11"
11" × 15" → 8 1/2" × 11"
*. Paper feed direction
a = 8mm, 0.32"
74
65
11"
×
17"
→
8 1/2"
×
11", 8 1/2"
×
11"
→
5 1/2"
×
8 1/2"
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios
A Press the [Ratio] key.
G Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
1
H Make your prints.
B Select the desired ratio with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
E Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
F Press the {Start} key.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Auto Magnification
Use this function to have the machine can choose an appropriate enlargement or
reduction ratio based on the size of your original and the paper size you select.
1
GRAUTO0E
Note
❒ The range of ratios from which the machine can select depends on where you
place the original:
• On the exposure glass: 50 – 200%
combinations of original and paper size.
❖ Metric version
A5L *2 A5K *2
Original A3L
B4L
A4L
A4K
B5L
B5K
Paper
A3L
B4L
A4L
100%
87%
71%
115%
100%
82%
141%
122%
100%
--
--
163%
141%
115%
--
--
200%
173%
141%
--
--
100%
115%
141%
71% *1
61%
82% *1
71%
100% *1
87%
100%
122%
A4K
B5L
B5K
A5L
B6L
87% *1
87%
100% *1
100%
122% *1
122%
61% *1
50%
--
71% *1
50%
87% *1
71%
100% *1
82%
122% *1
87%
71% *1
61% *1
82% *1
71% *1
100% *1
87% *1
50%
61%
71%
*1
The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper
direction and selects an appropriate reproduction ratio. ⇒ P.81 “Image Rotation”.
Set these originals in the optional document feeder.
*2
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Magnification
❖ Inch version
81/2" × 14" 81/2" × 11" 81/2" × 11" 81/2" × 51/2" 81/2 × 51/2"
Original 11" × 17"
L
L *2
K *2
L
L
K
Paper
11" × 17"L 100%
121%
100%
129%
--
--
--
200%
155%
--
--
1
81/2" × 14"
L
77%
81/2" × 11"
L
100% *1
100%
129% *1
129%
65%
77%
100%
129%
81/2" × 11" 65% *1
K
77% *1
61%
100% *1
65%
129% *1
100%
81/2"×51/2"
L
65% *1
100% *1
50%
*1
direction and selects an appropriate reproduction ratio. ⇒ P.81 “Image Rotation”.
Set these originals in the optional document feeder.
*2
❒ Depending on the original type, a suitable reproduction ratio might not be
able to be selected. ⇒ P.13 “Originals” and ⇒ P.123 “Originals”.
A Place your original on the exposure glass or in the optional document feed-
er.
B Press the [Ratio] key.
C Select [Auto] with the [→] or {}} key.
D Press the [OK] key.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
E Press the {Start} key.
1
Note
❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] keys (⇒
P.23 “Adjusting the Position of Printed Images”).
G Make your prints.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom
Zoom
Use this function to fine-tune the re-
production ratio in 1% steps.
C Press the [OK] key.
1
D Make sure that [Zoom] is selected.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Select the desired reproduction
ratio in one of the following
ways:
GRZOOM0E
Note
❒ The range in which you can select
a ratio depends on where you
place the original:
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
• On the exposure glass: 50–200%
A Press the [Ratio] key.
Using the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys
A Adjust the ratio with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}
key.
Note
❒ To select a custom ratio, select
the closest ratio with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys. Then
press the {|} or {{} key and go
to step F.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
K Check the image position of the
Using the number keys
trial or proof print.
A Enter the ratio with the num-
ber keys.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
1
L Make your prints.
B Press the {q} key.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
I Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
J Press the {Start} key.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directional Magnification (%)
Directional Magnification (%)
Use this function to choose different
D Select [Direct.Mag.(%)] with the [→]
reproduction ratios for the horizontal
and vertical directions. The result is a
squeezing or stretching effect.
or {}} key.
1
a%
b%
E Press the [OK] key.
CP2P01EE
F Enter the vertical and horizontal
ratio.
Note
❒ The range in which you can select
ratios depends on where you place
the original:
• On the exposure glass: 50 –
200%
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
A Press the [Ratio] key.
Adjusting ratios with the [←] [→]
or {~} {}} keys
A Adjust the vertical ratio with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
B Press the {{} key.
C Adjust the horizontal ratio with
B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}
key.
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
Entering ratios with the number
keys
A Enter the vertical ratio with the
number keys.
B Press the {q} key.
C Enter the horizontal ratio with
C Press the [OK] key.
the number keys.
D Press the {q} key.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
G Press the [OK] key.
H Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
1
I Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
J Press the {Start} key.
K Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
L Make your prints.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directional Magnification (Size)
Directional Magnification (Size)
Use this function to have the machine
select suitable reproduction ratios
based upon the dimensions of the
print you require, and the size of the
original you specify.
A Press the [Ratio] key.
1
1
3
2
4
B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}
key.
CP2M01EE
1. Horizontal original size
2. Vertical original size
3. Horizontal print size
4. Vertical print size
Note
C Press the [OK] key.
❒ You can enter the sizes within the
following ranges:
D Select [Direct.Mag.(Size)] with the
Metric ver-
sion
1 - 999mm (in 1mm steps)
[→] or {}} key.
Inch version 0.1" - 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)
❒ The range of ratios from which the
machine can select depends on
where you place the original:
• On the exposure glass: 50-200%
❒ If the calculated ratio is over the
maximum or under the minimum
ratio, it is corrected within the
range of the ratio automatically.
E Press the [OK] key.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Enter the vertical original size M Press the {Start} key.
with the number keys and press
the {q} key.
1
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
N Check the image position of the
❒ Up to 999mm, 99.9" can be en-
trial or proof print.
tered.
G Enter the vertical print size with
the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
H Enter the horizontal original size
with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
O Make your prints.
I Enter the horizontal print size
with the number keys.
J Press the [OK] key.
The machine will select appropri-
ate reproduction ratios for the ver-
tical and horizontal directions.
K Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
L Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Center and Edge Margins
Erasing Center and Edge Margins
When printing from thick books, or
similar originals, the binding margin
at the center and the edges might ap-
pear on prints. To prevent this, per-
form the following steps.
B Keep the platen cover at an angle
of at least 25 degrees with the ex-
posure glass.
1
C Press the {Start} key.
Important
❒ Be sure to keep the platen cover at
an angle of at least 25 degrees with
the exposure glass.
❒ If you do not press hard on the
book while it is scanned, the mar-
gin at the center might no be
erased completely.
Note
❒ If your originals have solid images
at the edges, the machine might
ows and not copy them. In this
case, use Edge Erase mode so that
only the shadows are not copied.
⇒ P.40 “Edge Erase”
Note
❒ Press hard on the book with
your hand while it is scanned.
D Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
A Set the book on the exposure
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
glass.
E Make your prints.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Edge Erase
This function erases all four margins
of the original image.
B Select the size and direction of the
original with the [←] [→] or {~}
{}} keys.
1
❖ Using Edge Erase mode
A
B
A
B
GRERAS0E
❖ When not using Edge Erase mode
When printing from thick books,
or similar originals, the binding
margin at the center and the edges
might appear on prints. The ma-
chine erases these margins auto-
matically. If you do not use Edge
Erase mode using the following
kind of originals, the images to be
printed might be also erased.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
E Press the {Start} key.
A
B
GRERAS1E
Note
F Check the image position of the
❒ You can adjust the size of the mar-
gins with the user tools. The de-
fault is 2mm, 0.1". ⇒ P.152 “3-11
Margin Erase Area”.
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
A Press the {Edge Erase} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
G Make your prints.
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS150N
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper
Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper
Before printing onto thick paper, thin
paper, envelopes or special kinds of
paper loaded in the paper feed tray,
you must select the paper type.
Printing onto Standard Paper
1
If you wish to print onto standard
(47.1 to 105g/m2, 12.5 to 28 lb) paper,
perform the following steps.
Printing onto Thick Paper
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
If you wish to print onto thick (128 to
209.3g/m2, 34 to 55.6 lb or heavier)
paper, perform the following steps.
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
B Make sure that [Std.] is selected.
B Select [Thick] with the [→] or {}}
key.
C Press the [OK] key.
Printing onto Envelopes
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
C Press the [OK] key.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
B Select [Special] with the [→] or
Printing onto Special Kinds of
Paper
{}} key.
1
Preparation
To use this function, you have to
register the special paper type in
[User1] or [User2] with the user
tools. ⇒ P.155 “4-19 Type of Paper”.
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Place the envelopes in the paper
feed tray as shown in the illustra-
tion.
B Select [User1] or [User2] with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
GRENVE0E
*.Paper feed direction
Note
❒ When you use envelopes, the
paper feed tray capacity is
about 150 sheets (85g/m2, 22 lb)
or enough to load a stack up to
105mm, 4.1" high.
C Press the [OK] key.
E If your envelopes do not feed in
well, lift the paper feed tray a lit-
tle, and then lower it so that it
slants up slightly.
ZDZY030E
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
If paper misfeeds occur frequently,
even if you select a suitable paper
type, follow the steps below.
1
A Press the [Select] key.
B Select the type of paper misfeed
and frequency with the {~}, {}},
{|}, or {{} keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
If paper misfeeds occur frequently in
the paper exit section, even if you use
standard or thin paper and select the
A Set the wing guide to the “Down”
position with the user tools. See
“Deflector Angle” ⇒ P.142 “4.
Mode Setting”.
If A4 – B5, 81/2" × 11" thick paper is
not delivered properly to the paper
A Set the wing guide to the “Up” po-
sition with the user tools. See “De-
flector Angle” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode
Setting”.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Selecting Original Modes
Select one of the following five modes
to match your originals:
Letter/Photo Mode Printing
1
❖ Letter mode
Select when originals contain only
letters (no pictures).
Preparation
You can adjust the contrast of the
image.
❖ Letter/Photo mode
Select when originals contain pho-
tographs or pictures with letters.
A Press the [Original] key.
❖ Photo mode
Select when originals contain pho-
tographs or pictures with delicate
tones.
❖ Pencil mode
Select when originals are written
in pencil.
B Select [Letter/Photo] with the [→]
or {}} key.
❖ Tint mode
Select when you want to make
halftone printing.
Note
❒ You can adjust the sharpness of
text in Letter mode with the user
tools (see “Adjusting sharpness of
letters” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Setting”).
❒ When using Photo mode to print
originals with both text and photo-
graphs, the text will appear lighter.
To avoid this, select Letter/Photo
mode. Alternatively, use the op-
tional Make-up mode to specify
Letter mode for text areas and Pho-
to mode for photograph areas.
C Press the [Contrast] key.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Original Modes
D Adjust the contrast with the [←]
Photo Mode Printing
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
A Press the [Original] key.
1
Note
❒ Use "High" to produce a clear
B Select [Photo] with the [→] or {}}
print of people's faces.
key.
❒ Use "Low" to produce a clear
prints of landscapes and scen-
ery etc.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
G Press the {Start} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
Adjusting the photo mode
contrast
H Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
A Press the [Contrast] key.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
I Make your prints.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
B Adjust the contrast with the
G Press the {Start} key.
[←][→] or {~}{}} keys.
1
C Press the [OK] key.
H Check the image position of the
Note
trial or proof print.
❒ Use "High" to produce a clear
print of people's faces.
❒ Use "Low" to produce a clear
prints of landscapes and
scenery etc.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
D Select the dot pattern with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
I Make your prints.
Note
❒ Four dot patterns are available:
• Setting 1: clearest
• Setting 2: clearer than setting 3
• Setting 3: clearer than setting 4
• Setting 4: clearer than the stan-
dard setting
E Press the [OK] key.
F Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Original Modes
F Check the image position of the
Pencil Mode Printing
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
❒ Originals written in pencil should
1
be placed on the exposure glass.
A Press the [Original] key.
G Make your prints.
B Select [Pencil] with the [→] or {}}
key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Place your original on the expo-
sure glass.
E Press the {Start} key.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Economy Mode
When you want to save ink, select
Economy mode.
1
Note
❒ Prints will be lighter in this mode.
A Press the {Economy Mode} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS020N
B Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
C Press the {Start} key.
D Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
E Make your prints.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Cycle
Auto Cycle
Use the {Auto Cycle} key to process
masters and make prints in a single
operation.
D Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
❒ When you use the optional docu-
ment feeder, it is not necessary to
place originals one by one. All
originals are fed and prints are
completed after you press the
{Start} key.
E Press the {Auto Cycle} key.
F Press the {Print} key.
Note
A Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
Note
❒ You can place up to 50 originals
into the optional document
feeder.
B Enter the number of prints re-
quired with the number keys.
C Press the {Start} key.
❒ Repeat steps A through C until
all originals are printed when
you are placing originals on the
exposure glass.
❒ If you placing the original in the
optional document feeder, orig-
inals are fed and prints are com-
pleted automatically.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
All Class Mode
Preparation
Note
You have to store the number of
students in each class with the user
tools. ⇒ P.151 “3-5 Class Enter No.”
❒ When you choose All Class mode,
Job Separation mode is automati-
cally turned on. The job separator
pulls the top sheet of the each set
delivered to the paper delivery
tray to mark the end of each print-
ed set. The next cycle begins auto-
❒ You can cancel Job Separation
mode in All Class mode with the
user tools (see “Auto Separate” ⇒
P.142 “4. Mode Setting”).
1
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. All the
stored numbers of prints are made for
each set.
This feature is useful for teachers who
frequently make multiple print sets
for all the classes e.g. notes, handouts,
test etc.
Using a standard print mode, the
teacher would have to stand by the
machine entering the number of
prints and pressing the {Print} key for
each class. However, All Class mode
allows you to store the number of stu-
dents in each class into the machine
memory beforehand with the user
tools. Whenever you need to make
print sets for all the classes, place
your original, select [ALL] and press
the {Start} key. Print sets will be made
containing the correct number of
prints for each class.
A Press the {Class} key.
B Make sure that the [ALL] is select-
ed.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Place one original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
GRCLAS2E
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All Class Mode
E Press the {Start} key.
1
F Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
G Make your prints.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Auto Class Mode
Preparation
Note
You have to store the number of
students in each class with the user
tools. ⇒ P.151 “3-5 Class Enter
No.”.
❒ When you set Auto Class mode,
Job Separation mode is automati-
cally turned on. The job separator
pulls the top sheet of the each set
delivered to the paper delivery
tray to mark the end of each print-
ed set. The next cycle begins auto-
1
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. The
stored numbers of prints are made for
each set.
❒ You can cancel Job Separation
mode in Auto Class mode with the
user tools (see “Auto Separate” ⇒
P.142 “4. Mode Setting”).
This feature is useful for teachers who
frequently make multiple print sets
for their classes, ex. notes, handouts,
tests etc.
Using a standard print function, the
teacher would have to stand by the
machine entering the number of
prints and pressing the {Print} key for
each class. However, Auto Class
mode allows you to store the number
of students in each class into the ma-
chine memory beforehand with the
user tools. Then, whenever you need
to make print sets for several classes,
place your original, select the classes
who need prints and press the {Start}
key. Print sets will be made contain-
ing the correct number of prints for
each class.
A Press the {Class} key.
B Select [By-class] with the [→] or
{}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
GRCLAS2E
D Select the desired classes for each
grade.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Class Mode
Selecting classes with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} key
Selecting classes with the
number keys
A Select the desired class for the
A Enter the desired grade and
1st grade with the {}} key.
class with the number keys.
1
The number of students is dis-
played on the counter.
Note
❒ When you want to select all
the classes, select [ALL].
B Press the [Select] key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps A and B until
you have finished designat-
ing classes for the 1st grade.
Note
❒ For example, to select grade 2
class 4, enter 24.
❒ To cancel a class selection, se-
lect that class with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} key, and
then press the [Cancel] key.
❒ When you want to select all
the classes for one grade, en-
ter the grade number fol-
lowed by 0.
❒ When you want to select
many classes for one grade,
first select [ALL] and press the
[Select] key, and then dese-
lect the unnecessary classes
with the [Cancel] key.
B Press the {q} key.
C Press the {{} key.
Now you can select classes for
the 2nd grade.
D Select the desired class for the
2nd grade with the {~}, {}},
{|}, or {{} key.
E Press the [Select] key.
Note
❒ To cancel a class, select that
class with the {~}, {}}, {|},
or {{} key, and then press
the [Cancel] key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps C to E until
you have finished designat-
ing all the desired classes.
❒ Repeat steps A and B until
you have finished selecting
all the desired classes.
E Press the [OK] key.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Place one original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
G Press the {Start} key.
1
H Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
I Make your prints.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Class Mode with One Original
Manual Class Mode with One Original
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. Vari-
ous numbers of prints are made for
each set.
B Select [Manual] with the [→] or
{}} key.
1
C Press the [OK] key.
GRCLAS2E
D Enter the desired number of
prints for the first set with the
number keys.
Note
❒ When you set the Manual Class
mode, Job Separation mode is au-
tomatically turned on. The job sep-
arator pulls the top sheet of each
set delivered to the paper delivery
tray to mark the end of each print-
ed set. The next cycle begins auto-
❒ To stop Job Separation mode from
automatically turning on, use the
user tools. (see “Auto Separate” ⇒
P.142 “4. Mode Setting”).
A Press the {Class} key.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Enter the desired number of K Check the image position of the
prints for the second set with the
number keys.
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
1
L Make your prints.
G Press the {q} key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G for each
set.
❒ The maximum number of sets
that can be made is 20.
H Press the [OK] key.
I Place one original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
J Press the {Start} key.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Class Mode with 2 or More Originals
Manual Class Mode with 2 or More
Originals
1
Preparation
A Press the {Class} key.
select “by each original” with the
“Class Manual Set” setting in the
user tools. See “Class Manual Set”
⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Setting”.
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from different originals. Vari-
ous numbers of prints are made for
each set.
B Select [Manual] with the [→] or
A B
A
{}} key.
B
C
C D
D
GRCLAS1E
Note
❒ When you set Manual Class mode,
Job Separation mode is automati-
cally turned on. The job separator
pulls the top sheet of the each set
delivered to the paper delivery
tray to mark the end of each print-
ed set. The next cycle begins auto-
C Press the [OK] key.
D Enter the desired number of
prints for the first original with
the number keys.
mode whenever you set the Manu-
al Class mode with the user tools.
(see “Auto Separate” ⇒ P.142 “4.
E Press the {q} key.
and make prints of all of them at
once. ⇒ P.126 “Manual Class Mode
with Two or More Originals Using
the Document Feeder”.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Enter the desired number of L Press the {Auto Cycle} key.
prints for the second original
with the number keys.
1
M Press the {Print} key.
G Press the {q} key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G for each
original.
❒ Up to 20 classes can be set.
H Press the [OK] key.
I Place the first original face down
on the exposure glass.
N After the first set is completed,
place the second original on the
exposure glass, and then press the
{Start} key.
J Press the {Start} key.
K Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ Repeat step N until you have
finished printing.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] keys (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Class Mode
Class Mode
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. The
same numbers of prints are made for
each set.
B Select [Same-NO.] with the [→] or
{}} key.
1
R R R
R
R R R
C Press the [OK] key.
GRCLAS0E
D With the number keys, enter the
desired number of prints for each
set.
Note
❒ When you choose Class mode, Job
Separation mode is automatically
turned on. The job separator pulls
to the paper delivery tray to mark
the end of each printed set. The
next cycle begins automatically. ⇒
P.76 “Job Separation”.
E Press the {q} key.
mode whenever you set the Class
mode with the user tools. See “Au-
to Separate” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
A Press the {Class} key.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F With the number keys, enter the
number of sets you wish to make.
1
Note
❒ Up to 99 sets can be selected for
an original.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Place one original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
I Press the {Start} key.
J Check the image position is the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. ⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
K Make your prints.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combine Originals
Combine Originals
You can combine originals in two ways:
1
1 2
1 2
GRCOMB2E
❖ 2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 2 images
Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with the two
images placed side-by-side.
❖ 2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 4 images
Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with each im-
age duplicated (total of four images).
Note
❒ You can also use Memory Combine mode. ⇒ P.114 “Memory Combine”.
❒ You can set the machine to cancel Combine Originals mode after finishing
your print job with the user tools. See “Cancel Comb.” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
❒ Any image closer than 8mm, 0.32" to the leading edge of the first original will
not be printed. Any image closer than 4mm, 0.16" to the leading edge of the
second original will also not be printed. When the image is too close to the
leading edge, use copies of the originals with the image shifted at least 8mm,
0.32" for the first original (4mm, 0.16" for the second original) from the leading
edge.
❒ You can select different image settings for the first and second original.
❒ Make sure that the paper feed side plates touch the paper lightly, and that the
paper size and direction shown on the panel display match the size and direc-
tion of paper actually placed in the paper feed tray. Either case can cause the
two original images not to appear at the proper position on prints.
❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used with the Combine
feature (2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 2 images).
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
❖ Metric version
Original Size
A4K
100%
87%
B5K
115%
100%
82%
A5K
141%
122%
100%
87%
B6K
163%
141%
115%
100%
82%
A6K
200%
173%
141%
122%
100%
Paper Size A3L
1
B4L
A4L
B5L
A5L
71%
61%
71%
50%
58%
71%
❖ Inch version
Original Size
81/2" × 11"K
100%
51/2" × 81/2"K
129%
Paper Size
11" × 17"L
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"L
51/2" × 81/2"L
77%
100%
65%
50%
100%
65%
❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used with the Combine
feature (2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 4 images).
❖ Metric version
Original Size
A3L
B4L
A4L
71%
61%
50%
-
B5L
82%
71%
58%
50%
-
A5L
100%
87%
71%
61%
50%
B6L
115%
100%
82%
A6L
141%
122%
100%
87%
Paper
Size
A3L
B4L
A4L
B5L
A5L
50%
58%
-
-
-
-
50%
-
-
-
71%
-
58%
71%
❖ Inch version
Original Size
81/2" × 14"
L
81/2" × 11"
L
51/2" × 81/2"
L
11" × 17"L
Paper Size
11" × 17"L
50%
-
65%
50%
65%
50%
100%
77%
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"L
51/2" × 81/2"L
-
-
-
-
50%
-
77%
50%
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combine Originals
❒ If a suitable reproduction ratio is not selected, images might not completely
appear on prints.
❒ Originals reading from left to right.
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
3
4
ZDZX160E
Reference
When you use the optional document feeder with this function, ⇒ P.125
“Combine Printing with the Document Feeder”.
A Place the first original face down.
ZDCH110E
Note
❒ When you place original sideways (K), the top should be toward the op-
eration panel as shown above.
B Enter the number of prints using the number keys.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Note
❒ To have the machine choose a suitable ratio automatically, use Auto Mag-
nification mode. ⇒ P.30 “Auto Magnification”.
1
D Press the {Combine} key.
E Select [Combine 2] or [Quadruple] with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
F Press the [OK] key.
G Press the {Start} key.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combine Originals
H The beeper sounds after the first original has been stored. Place the second
original face down.
1
ZDCH110E
I Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] key (⇒
P.23 “Adjusting the Position of Printed Images”).
K Make your prints.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Auto Combine Mode
Preparation
B Enter the number of prints using
the number keys.
To use this function, you have to
select Auto Combine mode with
the user tools. See “Combine” ⇒
P.142 “4. Mode Setting”.
1
You can have images duplicated in
two ways:
1
1 1
C Check the print paper size and the
reproduction ratio.
GRACOM0E
❒ To have the machine choose a
suitable ratio automatically, use
Auto Magnification mode. ⇒
P.30 “Auto Magnification”.
❖ 1 single-sided original → 1 single-sid-
ed print of 2 images
The original image is duplicated
twice on one print.
D Press the {Combine} key.
❖ 1 single-sided originals → 1 single-
sided print of 4 images
four times on one print.
Reference
⇒ P.61 “Combine Originals” for de-
tails.
A Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
E Select [Repeat 2] or [Repeat 4] with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Combine Mode
F Press the [OK] key.
G Press the {Start} key.
1
H Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
I Make your prints.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Skip Feed Printing
You can increase the time between
prints using the {Skip Feed} key. By
default, when one sheet of paper is
fed, the drum rotates twice. However,
you can select the number of drum ro-
tations. This gives you a chance to re-
move prints one by one from the
paper delivery tray or insert one sheet
of paper between two prints. If you
use this function, you can also use pa-
per longer than 432mm, 17.0" in spite
of the maximum length limitations of
paper.
C If necessary select the number of
drum rotations per sheet of paper
fed with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
1
Note
Note
❒ You can also select the number
of rotations with the number
keys.
You can change this default setting
with the user tools. See “No. of
Skip Feed” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
❒ You can select from 2 to 9 rota-
tions.
❒ By default, the machine asks
you to confirm the number of
omitted by adjusting the user
tool settings. See “No. of Skip
Feed” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
❒ The maximum length of paper in
Skip Feed mode is 460mm, 18.1".
❒ When you use paper longer than
432mm, 17.0", prints will not be de-
livered to the paper delivery tray
properly, so lower the paper deliv-
ery end plate and take the prints by
hand.
D Press the [OK] key.
E Press the {Start} key.
A Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
B Press the {Skip Feed} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS030N
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Skip Feed Printing
F Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
1
G Make your prints.
Note
❒ After printing is completed, the
Skip Feed setting returns to de-
fault.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Programs
You can store up to 9 frequently used
print job settings in machine memory
and recall them for future use.
D Press the [OK] key.
1
Note
❒ The program numbers (1 to 9)
will be displayed in the panel
display.
Note
❒ Stored programs are not cleared
when you turn off the main switch.
tected, that program number
will not appear in the panel dis-
play. To change a protected user
program, ⇒ P.71 “Protecting a
Program”.
❒ Stored programs cannot be delet-
ed. If you want to change a stored
program, overwrite it.
Storing a Program
❒ If all the user programs have
been protected, you cannot
store any settings. Press the
[Cancel] key.
A Set the print settings you want to
put into memory.
B Press the {Program} key.
E Select the program number you
want to store the settings in with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
C Select [Store] with the [→] or {}}
Note
key.
❒ You can also select the program
number with the number keys.
F Press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ If this program number is al-
ready used, the machine asks
whether you wish to overwrite
it or not. Press the [Yes] or [No]
key.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programs
E Press the [Select] key.
Protecting a Program
F Press the [OK] key.
If you want to prevent someone from
writing over your program, do the
following:
1
Removing Program Protection
A Press the {Program} key.
A Press the {Program} key.
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
{}} key.
{}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select the program number you
want to protect with the [←] [→]
or {~} {}} keys.
D Select the program number you
want to remove protection from
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
Note
❒ Already protected program
numbers are shown with a
black background (e.g. A).
❒ You can also select the program
71
number with the number keys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Note
D Select the program number you
want to recall with the [←] [→] or
{~} {}} keys.
❒ Already protected program
numbers are shown with a
black background (e.g. A).
1
❒ You can also select the program
number with the number keys.
E Press the [Cancel] key.
F Press the [OK] key.
Recalling a Program
Note
❒ You can also select the program
A Press the {Program} key.
number with the number keys.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
G Press the {Start} key.
B Make sure that [Recall] is selected.
C Press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ Programs that have been stored
beforehand are represented by a
number.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Mode
Security Mode
This function prevents others from
making prints of confidential docu-
ments from the master. For example,
if you want to print some documents
with sensitive information, use this
function after making your prints so
that nobody can access that master
again.
C Press the [Yes] key.
1
A Make your prints.
B Press the {Security} key.
Note
❒ If you set Security Mode, you
cannot make prints after finish-
ing one job even you press the
{Proof} key or the {Print} key.
Press the [Exit] key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
❒ You cannot cancel Security
mode even if you turn off the
main switch.
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
❒ If you make the next master, Se-
ZDZS040N
curity mode is canceled.
❒ You cannot pull out the drum
unit before making the next
master.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Quality Start Mode
If the machine is not used for a long
period of time or you change the color
drum unit, the ink on the drum might
dry causing print quality to deterio-
rate. To solve this problem, you can
have the machine carry out a few idle
spins of the drum before a print run.
This will restore image quality and
save you having to make a repeat
print run.
Note
spins in Manual Quality Start
mode with the user tools. See
“Idling for Q.start” ⇒ P.142 “4.
Mode Setting”.
1
has passed in Auto Quality Start
mode with the user tools. See “No.
of Q.start” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
You can use this feature in two ways:
❖ Manual Quality Start
Choose Quality Start mode for the
next print run manually using the
{Quality Start} key.
❒ Use this mode in combination with
Energy Saver mode to produce
even better results.
❖ Auto Quality Start
Have the machine check automati-
cally how long ago the machine
was used before each print run. If
the machine has not been used for
a long time, Quality Start will be
Auto Quality Start mode is on. You
can turn it off with the user tools.
See “Setting Q.start” ⇒ P.142 “4.
Mode Setting”.
You can set whether Auto Quality
and After print by selecting Yes or
No in Auto Quality Start mode
with the user tools. ⇒ P.142 “4.
Mode Setting”.
If Before print is selected for Auto
Quality Start mode, the machine
carries out a few idle spins before a
print run.
If After print is selected for Auto
Quality Start mode, the machine
carries out ink removal before en-
tering Energy Saver mode to pre-
vent ink bleeding for the print.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quality Start Mode
Using Quality Start Manually
A Press the {Quality Start} key.
1
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS050N
B Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
C Press the {Start} key.
The drum unit idles.
D Make your prints.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Job Separation
The print on the top of each print set in the paper delivery tray is pulled by the
job separator. This function is useful when you make 2 or more print sets.
1
GRJOBS0E
R CAUTION:
• While printing, do not touch the belt at the end of the paper delivery tray or
the job separator. Otherwise you might be injured.
Limitation
❒ In Job Separation mode, the following limitations apply:
❖ Metric version
Minimum paper size
Maximum paper weight
Paper delivery tray capacity
127.9g/m2
600 sheets (64g/m2)
Length: 210mm
Width: 128mm
❖ Inch version
Minimum paper size
Maximum paper weight
Paper delivery tray capacity
Length: 8.3"
Width: 5.1"
34 lb
600 sheets (17 lb)
Note
❒ When you use thin paper, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.
The job separator might tear the paper.
case, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.
❒ When you do not use Job Separation mode, you can select the machine con-
dition after each print set is fed out to the paper delivery tray with the user
tools. See “Auto Class” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Setting”.
❒ If there are less than 10 sheets of paper in the paper delivery tray, the machine
may not be able to use Job Separation mode.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Job Separation
A Press the {Job Separator} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
1
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS060N
B Make your prints.
Note
❒ After the last page of each print set is fed out to the paper delivery tray, the
job separator pulls the last sheet of each group in Job Separation mode. The
next Job separation begins.
ZDZH110E
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Conserving the Master
The machine automatically changes
the master length depending on the
paper size you use. This saves both
master and ink.
1
a = Images on the master
b = Masters
c = Area that you can save master and ink
Limitation
❒ The optional document feeder is
required.
Note
❒ This function is turned on when
you use A4K, 81/2" × 11" K or
B5K paper and you set 2 or more
originals in the optional document
feeder.
❒ You can cancel Master Saving
mode with the user tools. See
Setting”. You can also save master
using the optional A4, 81/2" × 11"
drum. ⇒ P.132 “Changing the Drum
Size”.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On Line Printing
On Line Printing
On Line printing allows you to use
this machine as a PC printer.
When a print job has not finished
printing while in online mode
1
Limitation
If print job has not finished print-
ing and the job is interrupted, the
machine cannot receive data from
the PC. To print the next job from
the PC, cancel the interrupted
print job.
❒ The optional PC controller is re-
quired.
Note
❒ Before printing onto A5K, 51/2" ×
81/2" K, or non-standard size pa-
per, you need to select the paper
size with the [Ppr.Type] key.
A Press the [fin PRINT] key.
per from the paper feed tray, select
the paper type before pressing the
{On Line} key. ⇒ P.41 “Printing
onto Various Kinds of Paper”.
A Press the {On Line} key.
When printing onto A5K, 51/2" 81/2"
K, or non-standard paper sizes
×
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS070N
B Select A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K, or
Custom (non-standard) with
the [←] or [→] key.
C Press the [OK] key.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
When printing onto standard
paper sizes or sizes other than
A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K
A Refer to the PC controller man-
1
ual.
Auto On Line
You can select whether the machine
automatically switches to On Line
mode when it receives data from a
PC.
Preparation
• The default setting for On Line
mode is On. However, you can
change the setting to Off if re-
quired.
• You can press the {Auto On Line}
key to switch Auto On Line on
or off. If the Auto On Line indi-
cator is lit, Auto On Line is ac-
tive. If the indicator is off, Auto
On Line is inactive.
• When the Auto On Line indica-
tor is lit, Auto On Line has pri-
ority when data is received
from a PC. If you want to pre-
vent the machine from inter-
rupting a print job when it
receives data from a PC, press
the {Auto On Line} key so the
Auto On Line indicator goes off
and Auto On Line is inactive.
A Press the {Auto On Line} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS160N
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Rotation
Image Rotation
When your original setting direction is different from the paper direction, the
machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper di-
rection.
1
Note
❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used in Image Rotation
mode.
❖ Metric version
Original A3L
B4L
A4L
A4K
B5L
B5K
A5L✩ A5K✩
Paper
A4L
A4K
B5L
B5K
A5L
B6L
--
#
--
#
--
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
#
--
#
--
#
#
#
#
#
#
#: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-
per direction.
✩: Place these originals in the optional document feeder.
❖ Inch version
81/2" × 14" 81/2" × 11" 81/2" × 11" 51/2" × 81/2" 51/2"×81/2"
Original 11" × 17"
L
L
L
K
L✩
K✩
Paper
81/2" × 11"L
--
#
--
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
81/2" × 11"K
51/2" × 81/2"
L
#
#
#: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-
per direction.
✩: Place these originals in the optional document feeder.
Note
not be rotated.
❒ It takes longer than usual to make masters in Image Rotation mode.
❒ You can cancel Image Rotation mode with the user tools. See “Auto Rotation”
⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Setting”.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Make-up Printing Features
Make-up mode enables you to do more than just make an exact copy of the orig-
inal. A variety of editing and image processing functions allow you to quickly
and easily customize your prints.
1
Main Features
Command sheets allow you to create special effects without cutting and past-
ing—up to 4 commands can be given for an original. By combining Make-up
modes and printing with different color drums, you can create a variety of print-
ing effects.
Make-up Modes for Designated Areas
Mode
Sample
Designated Area
Command sheet/Original
(Closed area method)
Print
1.
2.
3.
4.
Letter mode
WORLD
WORLD
World computer and
peripheral devices
are equipped with
World computer and
peripheral devices
are equipped with
Photo mode
Delete Area mode
Outline mode
Hello!
Hello!
How are you?
How are you?
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing Features
Mode
Sample
Designated Area
Command sheet/Original
(Closed area method)
Print
5.
6.
7.
8.
P./N. mode (Positive Neg-
ative mode)
1
BALLET
BALLET
Solid mode (Image Pattern
mode)
BALLET
All Page Pattern mode
(Area Pattern mode)
LUNCH
MENU
LUNCH
MENU
All + Outline (Image Out-
line and Area Pattern
mode)
CAT
CAT
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Make-up Modes for Outside Designated Areas
Mode
Sample
Undesignated Area
Command sheet/Original
Print
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Letter mode: The area out-
side designated areas is
printed in Letter mode.
HAWAII
HAWAII
Please enjoy your
Summer vacation.
Please enjoy your
Summer vacation.
Photo mode: The area out-
side designated areas is
printed in Photo mode.
WORLD
World computer and
peripheral devices
are equipped with
Save Area mode: The area
outside the designated ar-
eas is deleted.
Outline mode: The area
outside the designated
area is printed in Outline
mode.
HAWAII
HAWAII
Note
❒ In Make-up mode, commands must be given for both designated areas and
areas outside the designated areas.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing Features
Background Patterns
A total of 164 background patterns is available in Make-up mode:
• 40 basic patterns
1
• 40 patterns similar to the basic patterns but with patterns elements at 4 times the size.
• 90° rotations of all the basic and enlarged patterns.
• 4 registered user patterns.
*. Paper Feed Direction
Note
❒ The basic patterns are numbered 1 to 40.
❒ You can make your own make-up background patterns with the user tools.
85
⇒ P.159 “5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
Command sheets are fed first so that the machine can recognize the areas of the
original which are to be edited as designated areas.
1
Command Sheets
The command sheet is a sheet of paper for designating areas to be edited. Com-
mand sheets must be made on white or translucent paper, and should be the
same size as the original.
Do not designate areas within 5 mm, 0.2" from the top.
Note
❒ Poor quality paper (such as newsprint, recycled paper, etc.) should not be
used for command sheets because any dark spots or streaks will be read as
designated areas.
❒ Do not use blotting paper or other absorbent paper for command sheets be-
cause ink might leak through the paper and get the exposure glass dirty.
Making a Command Sheet
There are two ways of designating areas: the diagonal line method and the
closed area method.
-Features
• You can combine up to 4 command sheets when making a master.
• You cannot use both the closed and diagonal line method on the same com-
mand sheet.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
• There is no limit to the number of areas you can designate on a single com-
mand sheet.
1
• If designated areas on two or more command sheets overlap, the last com-
mand sheet will apply for the overlapping portion.
• If you use Outline mode for letter images with a thickness of less than 3mm,
0.12", the print image might come out as expected.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
-Notes
The image might differ depending on how the designated area is drawn, so re-
member the following when making the command sheet:
1
Designated area
Area recognized
Preferred designated area
Part of the designated area is
surrounded by 3 sides of the en-
tire area.
Make a space of at least 2mm,
0.08", in front of the area surround-
ed by 3 sides (relative to the feed
direction).
1
2
1, 2 = 2mm, 0.08"
Double line pattern.
Only the outer line is Make a gap of at least 2mm, 0.08"
recognized.
in width.
The designated area is sur-
rounded by 3 sides of another
designated area.
Make a space of at least 2mm, 0.08"
in front of the area surrounded by
3 sides (relative to the feeding di-
rection).
2
1
1, 2 = 2mm, 0.08"
Non-closed line
Designate the area with a closed
line.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
Diagonal line method
Note
❒ A diagonal line must be drawn through the area that you wish to edit.
1
A Put the command sheet on top of the original.
ZM-20
B Draw a line using a felt tip pen (black, red or blue) with a thickness of at
least 1mm.
ZM-21
Note
❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.
❒ The diagonal line can be drawn from left to right or vice versa.
❒ Draw the line at least 2mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the whole
image can be recognized.
a
b
c
d
GRCOMM1E
a, b, c, d = 2mm, 0.08"
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2mm, 0.08",
from any neighboring image.
1
a
b
c
GRCOMM2E
a, b, c = 2mm, 0.08"
Closed area method
Note
❒ The line designating the area must be a closed loop.
A Put the command sheet on top of the original.
ZM-20
B Using a black, red, or blue felt tip pen, draw a line around the area to des-
ignate. The line should have a thickness of at least 1mm.
ZM-26
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
Note
❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.
❒ Draw the line at least 2mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the whole
image can be recognized.
1
a = Line marking the designated area
b = 2mm, 0.08"
c = Image within the designated area
❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2mm, 0.08",
from any neighboring image.
a
b
d
c
GRCOMM4E
a = 2mm, 0.08"
b = Neighboring image
c = Line marking the designated area
d = Image within the designated area
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Command Sheets and Finished Prints
The following illustrations will help you understand how to draw a command
sheet.
1
❖ Drawing a command sheet using a diagonal line
The diagonal line method is easy to use for designating rectangular areas. It is
also more precise, but it is difficult to use for designating complex areas.
❖ Drawing a command sheet using a closed line
fruit
The closed line method is easier to use for complex areas, but it is less precise. It
also takes longer to draw a command sheet with the closed line method.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing
Make-up Printing
A Press the {Make-Up} key.
E Select the mode for the first com-
mand sheet with the [←] [→] or
{~} {}} {|} {{} keys.
1
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS080N
B Make sure that [1] is selected.
F Press the [OK] key.
Then press the [OK] key.
G If necessary, select the pattern for
the first command sheet with the
{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key. Then
press the [OK] key.
C Select the frame shape with the
H If necessary, select the size and
direction of the pattern you se-
lected in step G with the [←] [→]
or {~} {}} keys.
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
D Press the [OK] key.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
I Press the [OK] key.
L Press the [OK] key.
Note
Note
❒ Follow steps B – I for the other
❒ When you select Photo mode
for both inside and outside ar-
eas, you cannot select different
dot patterns and contrast.
command sheets.
1
❒ You can select a pattern regis-
tered with the user tools for
only one command sheet.
❒ When you want to confirm your
settings, press the {Make-Up}
key twice. Then press the [OK]
key repeatedly until the panel
display reaches the setting you
want to confirm.
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
J After you have finished designat-
ing modes for all the command
sheets, select [Outside Area] with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
M If you have selected Photo mode,
select the dot pattern and the con-
trast with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
K Select the mode for the outside
area with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Note
❒ Four dot patterns settings are
available:
• Setting 1: clearest
• Setting 2: clearer than setting 3
• Setting 3: clearer than setting 4
• Setting 4: clearer than the stan-
dard setting
N Press the [OK] key.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing
O Place the first command sheet
face down on the exposure glass
and press the {Start} key.
1
The beeper sounds after the com-
mand sheet is scanned.
Note
❒ Repeat step O for the other com-
mand sheets.
P Place the original face down on
the exposure glass or face up into
the document feeder and press
the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If a command sheet or original
misfeeds from the document
feeder, remove the misfed sheet
or original and reset it in the
document feeder.
❒ It is not necessary to reset the
previous command sheets or
original.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Samples
-Sample 2
A Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape/, Designated area: All + Outline No. 30
B Command Sheet No. 2 Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern No.
17
1
C Outside area: Fn1
D Print
2
1
4
3
ZM-51
1. Original
3. Command sheet No.2
2. Command sheet No.1
4. Print
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
-Sample 3
A Print the original as it is
B Change the drum unit for color printing
1
C Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern
No. 39
D Outside area: Letter mode
E Print
2
1
3
ZM-52
1. Original
2. Command sheet No.1
3. Print
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original Storage
Original Storage
You can store frequently used origi-
nals in machine memory and then
easily recall them later to make prints
whenever they are needed.
Storing Original
1
Store the print images of the originals
you want to use frequently.
Preparation
Note
• You can store up to 8 Original
Storage settings in machine
memory.
❒ You can use this feature with:
• Reproduction Ratio
• The number of Original Storage
settings you can store depends
on the type of originals.
• Selecting Original Modes
• Adjusting the Image Density of
Prints
• You may not be able to store
Original Storage settings for
some types of original.
• Edge Erase
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
• The machine remembers Origi-
nal Storage settings even after
the power to the machine has
been switched off or the {Clear
Modes/Energy Saver} key has
been pressed to clear.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS170N
B Select [Store] with the [→] or {}}
key.
C Press the [OK] key.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
D Select the desired number to store
Non-standard size originals
with the [←][→] or {~}{}} keys.
A If you place non-standard size
original, this display will be
shown.
1
Press the [OK] key.
E Place the original on the exposure
glass as shown, then press the
{Start} key.
B Enter the vertical length with
the number key, and then
press the {#} key.
C Enter the horizontal width
with the number key, and then
press the {#} key.
ZDCH110E
Note
❒ If print images for an original
have already been stored in ma-
chine memory, check the stored
images and choose whether to
overwrite them or not. To over-
write the images, press the [Yes]
key. To keep the images, press
the [No] key.
D Place your originals on the ex-
posure glass, and then press
the {Start} key.
TPES580E
❒ If you select overwrite, the doc-
ument stored in memory will be
erased unless it is write protect-
ed.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original Storage
Selecting Stored Original
Protecting Stored Original
To select the images of originals that
have been stored in machine memo-
ry, do the following:
If you want to protect the images of
originals stored in machine memory,
do the following:
1
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
Protecting Original
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
Economy Mode
Original Storage
ZDZS170N
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
B Select [Select] with the [←][→] or
ZDZS170N
{~}{}} keys.
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
{}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select the number of the stored
original with the [←][→] or
{~}{}} keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select the number of the protect-
ing with the [←][→] or {~}{}}
keys.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Press the {Start} key.
E Press the [Select] key.
F Press the [OK] key.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Removing Original Protection
Deleting Stored Original
If you want to delete the images of
originals stored in machine memory,
do the following:
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
1
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Important
❒ You cannot restore the images
once they have been deleted.
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
ZDZS170N
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
{}} key.
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS170N
B Select [Delete] with the [→] or {}}
key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Press the [Cancel] key.
C Select the desired number to de-
lete with the [←][→] or {~}{}}
keys.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original Storage
D Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
1
TPES580E
Note
❒ Press the [No] key if you do not
wish to delete the Stored Origi-
nal.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Image Overlay
The machine can merge two different
originals onto the same print paper.
❖ Storage overlay
1
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
Two types of merging are available:
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
❖ Overlay
B
B
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
A
A
Combines the images of originals
stored in Original Storage with the
originals placed on the machine.
GROVER0E
Two different originals are merged
onto the same print paper.
Storage overlay
❖ Format
A Press the {Overlay} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
R
R
R
Economy Mode
Original Storage
GROVER1E
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
The image of the original which is
copied first will become the back-
ground image for all copies. The
following originals will be copied
with this background.
ZDZS090N
B Select [Storage overlay] with the
[←][→] or {~}{}} keys.
❖ On Line overlay
When your machine is equipped
with the optional PC controller, an
image sent from a PC and the orig-
inal image can be merged onto the
same print paper.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Overlay
C Press the [OK] key.
C Place you originals and print start
with your PC.
Note
Limitation
❒ If the one of original storage is
already chosen, the display in
step C does not shown. Skip to
step D.
❒ The optional PC controller is re-
quired to use On Line Overlay
mode.
1
❒ In order to get a correct print
image, the size of the original
and the PC image should be
identical.
D Press the [OK] key.
E Place your originals, and then
press the {Start} key.
Overlay.Format
On Line overlay
A Press the {Overlay} key.
A Press the {On Line} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS090N
ZDZS070N
B Select one of Image Overlay
modes with the [←] [→] or {~}
{}} keys.
B Press the {Overlay} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Make-Up
Auto On Line
Darker 2
Over lay
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS090N
C Press the [OK] key.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
D Place your originals, and then
Placing originals in the optional
document feeder
press the {Start} key.
A Place originals in the docu-
Placing originals on the exposure
glass
ment feeder.
1
A Place the first original on the
exposure glass.
ZDCH120E
B Press the {Start} key.
ZDCH110E
Note
B Press the {Start} key.
❒ When you select [Format] in
step B, the original for the
template should be on the
top.
Note
❒ When you select [Format] in
step B, the original for the
template should be placed
first.
❒ To change the background
image in Format mode, press
the {q} key. Then set the
next original for the template
and press the {Start} key.
❒ To change the background
image in Format mode, press
the {q} key. Then place the
next original for the template
and press the {Start} key.
C Place the next original on the
exposure glass.
D Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ When you select [Format] in
step B, repeat steps C and D.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Date Stamp
Date Stamp
Use this function to have the date
stamped on prints.
❒ The Date Stamp directions on the
panel display and actual print im-
ages are as follows:
1
Date Stamp Print image
direction on
the display
ZDZX010E
ZDZX050E
ZDZX080E
ZDZX110E
ZDZX140E
ZDZX040E
ZDZX060E
Preparation
Before you use this function, you
have to set the machine's internal
clock with the user tools. ⇒ P.150
“1-6 Time Setting”.
ZDZX070E
ZDZX090E
Limitation
❒ The font size of the date cannot be
changed.
❒ If you select Page Stamp and Date
Stamp together, the last stamp di-
rection selected takes priority.
ZDZX100E
ZDZX120E
Note
is “Month Day Year”. You can
change this setting with the user
tools. See “Date Style Set” ⇒ P.146
“5. Stamp”.
ZDZX130E
ZDZX150E
❒ You can edit the Date Stamp posi-
tion. ⇒ P.157 “5-7 Position (Date)”.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
A Press the {Stamp} key.
G Place your original, and then
press the {Start} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Placing your original (K) on the
exposure glass
Darker 1
Make-Up
Auto On Line
1
Darker 2
Over lay
Economy Mode
Original Storage
A Place your original as shown in
the illustration.
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS100N
B Make sure that [Date] is selected.
ZDCH110E
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select the desired position and di-
rection with the [←] [→] or {~}
{}} keys.
Placing your originals (K) in the
optional document feeder
A Place your originals as shown
in the illustration.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
ZDCH120E
TPES580E
Note
❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish
to set the other Stamp functions.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Stamp
Page Stamp
Use this function to have page num-
bers stamped on prints.
❒ You can edit the preset page num-
bering position with the user tools.
❒ [P1, P2,…, P5] is the default format.
You can change this default setting
with the user tools. See
“Type(Page)” ⇒ P.146 “5. Stamp”.
1
5
A Press the {Stamp} key.
–1 –
Image Density
Stamp
GRPAGE0E
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Three numbering formats are avail-
able:
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
• P1, P2,....., P5
• 1/5, 2/5,....., 5/5
• -1-, -2-,....., -3-
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS100N
Limitation
❒ The size and font of Page Stamp
cannot be changed.
B Select [Page] with the [→] or {}}
key.
❒ If you select Page Stamp and Date
Stamp together, the last stamp di-
rection selected takes priority.
Note
❒ Check the following table for the
relationship between the Page
Stamp direction on the panel dis-
play and the actual print image:
C Press the [OK] key.
Page Stamp Print image
directionon
the display
D Select the desired format with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
P.1
P.1
P.1
1/5
1/5
–1–
GRPPOS6E
–1–
–1–
GRPPOS4E
GRPPOS7E
GRPPOS5E
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
B Press the [OK] key.
E Press the [OK] key.
C Enter the first page number
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
If you selected [P1,P2] or [-1-,-2-]
1
A Enter the first page number
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Note
❒ You can also enter the page
number with the number
keys.
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
❒ You can also enter the page
number with the number
keys.
D Press the [OK] key.
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
F Select the desired orientation
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
B Press the [OK] key.
If you selected [1/5,2/5]
A Enter the last page number
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
Note
❒ You can also enter the page
number with the number
keys.
TPES580E
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
Note
❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish
to set the other Stamp modes.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Stamp
I Place your original, and then
press the {Start} key.
Placing your originals (K) on the
exposure glass
1
A Place the first original as
shown in the illustration.
ZDCH110E
Note
❒ Repeat step I for the other
originals.
Placing your originals (K) in the
optional document feeder
A Place your originals as shown
in the illustration.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ The first original should be
on the top.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Stamp
B Select [Stamp] with the [←] [→] or
{~} {}} keys.
1
Priority
R
R
Preliminary
Confidential
GRSTAM0E
One of the following 3 messages can
be stamped on prints.
C Press the [OK] key.
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
D Select the desired message with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
PRELIMINARY
Limitation
❒ Only one message can be stamped
at a time.
Note
tings (size, density, or position)
with the user tools. See “Size”,
“Stamp Density”, “Stamp Posi-
tion” ⇒ P.146 “5. Stamp”.
is selected as a default. You can
change this setting with the user
tools. See “Type” ⇒ P.146 “5.
Stamp”.
E Press the [OK] key.
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
A Press the {Stamp} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
G Press the [OK] key.
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS100N
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stamp
H Select the stamp position with the
Placing your originals (K) in the
optional document feeder
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
A Place your originals as shown
in the illustration.
1
I Press the [OK] key.
J Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
ZDCH120E
TPES580E
Note
❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish
to set the other Stamp modes.
K Place your original and press the
{Start} key.
Placing your original (K) on the
exposure glass (contact glass)
A Set your original as shown in
the illustration.
ZDCH110E
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Memory Combine
You can combine originals in four ways:
1
❖ 4 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 4 images
4 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 4 original images on one
side.
❖ 8 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 8 images
8 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 8 original images on one
side.
❖ 16 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 16 images
16 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 16 original images on
one side.
❖ Repeating an image over the entire print
1 original image is printed repeatedly.
Note
❒ A separation line between images can be printed with the user tools. See
“Comb. Sep. Line” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Setting”.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
Combining Several Single–sided Originals onto one Single–sided
Print
❖ 4 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 4 images
1
1
2
3
4
1
3
2
4
GRMCOM0E
❖ 8 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 8 images
1
2
1
5
2
3
7
4
8
6
7
8
1
2
1
2
3
5
7
4
6
8
7
8
GRMCOM1E
❖ 16 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 16 images
1
2
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
10 11 12
15
16
13 14 15 16
GRMCOM2E
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Limitation
❒ To use “16 one-sided originals → 1 one-sided print of 16 images” mode, the
optional document feeder is required.
❒ If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is corrected within the
range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the im-
age might not be copied.
1
❒ The machine cannot copy originals different in size and direction.
Note
❒ The number of originals printed (combined) can be 4, 8, or 16.
❒ In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This
reproduction ratio depends on the print paper size and the number of origi-
nals.
per direction.
❒ You can set the machine to cancel Memory Combine mode after finishing
your print job with the user tools. See “Cancel Comb.” ⇒ P.142 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
❒ Refer to the following table when you select the original and paper sizes.
Original A3L
B4L
A4KL
B5KL
A5KL
Paper
*3
*3
*3
*2
*3
*3
*2
*2
*3
*3
*1
*2
*2
*3
A3L
B4L
--
--
--
A4KL
B5KL
--
--
--
*1
*2
*3
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.
81/2" × 51/2"KL
Original 11" × 17"L
Paper
*3
*3
*3
*2
*3
*3
*1
*2
*2
*3
11" × 17"L
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"KL
51/2" × 81/2" L
--
--
--
--
--
--
*1
*2
*3
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
116
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
Original A3L
B4L
A4KL
B5KL
Paper
*2
*2
*2
*1
*2
*2
*1
*1
*2
*2
A3L
1
B4L
--
--
--
A4KL
B5KL
--
--
--
*1
*2
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.
Original 11" × 17"L
Paper
*2
*2
*2
*1
*2
*2
11" × 17"L
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"KL
51/2" × 81/2" L
--
--
--
--
--
--
*1
*2
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.
A Press the {Combine} key.
B Select [Memory Combine] with the [→] or {}} key.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select your desired mode.
1
E Press the [OK] key.
F Place your originals.
Placing your original (K) on the exposure glass
A Place your original as shown in the illustration.
ZDCH110E
Placing your originals (K) in the optional document feeder
A Place your originals as shown in the illustration.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ The first original should be on the top.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
G Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ Even if the number of originals is less than the number required in the se-
lected mode, prints can be made as shown in the illustration. In this case,
press the {q} key after all the originals have been scanned.
1
1
2
3
1
3
2
GRMCOM3E
❒ When placing an original on the exposure glass or one sheet at a time in the
optional document feeder, repeat steps F and G. After placing the last orig-
inal, press the {q} key, and then the {Start} key.
Repeat
GRREPE0E
Limitation
❒ Part of the repeated image might not be printed depending on the paper size,
direction and reproduction ratio.
Note
❒ The number of repeated images depends on the original and paper size, and
reproduction ratio.
❒ Check the following table for the relationship between the direction of the
original and paper, and the number of repeated images.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
❖ Example: copying A4 L originals onto A3L paper.
The number of repeated im- Reproduction ratio
ages
Print image
4
71%
1
GRREPE3E
❖ Example: copying A5L originals placed in the optional document feeder onto
A3L paper.
Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio
16 50%
Print image
GRREPE4E
❖ Example: copying 81/2" × 11" K originals onto 11" × 17" L paper.
Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio
100%
Print image
2
GRREPE5E
❖ Example: copying A5L originals placed in the optional document feeder onto
A4K paper.
Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio
50%
Print image
8
GRREPE6E
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
A Press the {Combine} key.
1
B Select [Memory Combine] with the [→] or {}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select [Repeat] with the [→] or {}} key.
F Select the reproduction ratio.
Reference
⇒ P.28 “Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios”.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
G Set your original.
Placing your original (K) on the exposure glass
1
A Place your original as shown in the illustration.
ZDCH110E
Placing your originals (K) in the optional document feeder
A Place your originals as shown in the illustration.
ZDCH120E
H Press the {Start} key.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Optional Functions
Optional Document Feeder
Insert a stack of originals in the docu-
ment feeder. It will be fed automati-
cally.
The following original sizes placed in
the document feeder can be detected.
Metric version
A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL,
B5 KL, A5KL
11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14"
L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2"
× 81/2"KL
Inch version
Originals
Placing the following originals in the
document feeder might cause mis-
feeds or damage to the originals.
Note
Place the following kinds of originals
on the exposure glass:
• Originals heavier than 128g/m2, 34 lb
• Originals lighter than 52g/m2, 14 lb
❒ Place originals after correction flu-
id and ink have completely dried.
Not taking this precaution could
mark the exposure glass and cause
marks to be printed.
• Originals smaller than 148mm ×
For standard printing functions, set
originals as shown below.
210mm, 5.9" × 8.3"
• Originals larger than 297mm ×
864mm, 11.6" × 34.0"
• Stapled or clipped originals
R
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased origi-
nals
R
• Originals with any kind of coating,
such as thermal fax paper, art pa-
per, aluminum foil, carbon paper,
or conductive paper
GRSETT1E
If the original is place in a different di-
rection from the print paper, the ma-
chine automatically rotates the
original image by 90° to match the
print paper direction.
• Bound originals such as books
• Damaged originals
• Originals with glue on them
• Pasted originals
You cannot place originals of differ-
ent sizes at the same time.
• Originals written in pencil
• Thin originals that are a little stiff
• Originals with index tabs
When you use thin originals, place
one original at a time in the document
feeder or place them on the exposure
glass.
• Transparent originals such as OHP
transparencies or translucent pa-
per
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
The first 8mm, 0.32", of the leading
edge and the last 2mm, 0.08" of the
trailing edge cannot be printed. Make
sure the leading edge margin is at
least 8mm, 0.32", and the trailing edge
margin is at least 2mm, 0.08".
C Adjust any print settings as nec-
essary, and then press the {Start}
key.
Do not stack originals above the limit
mark.
2
Placing Originals in the
Document Feeder
A Adjust the guide to the original
D Make your prints.
size.
B Insert the aligned originals face
up into the document feeder.
Note
❒ If the next original has been
placed in the document feeder
before the machine stops, that
original is fed automatically
and a trial print is delivered to
the paper delivery tray after the
print of the first original is com-
pleted. Check the image posi-
tion of the trial print of the next
original. If necessary, make
proof prints using the {Proof}
key to check the image position
again.
ZDCH120E
Limitation
❒ Approximately 50 originals
(80g/m2, 21 lb) can be inserted
at one time in the document
feeder. The first (top) original
will be fed first.
Note
❒ To avoid a multi-sheet feed,
shuffle the originals before plac-
ing them in the document feed-
er.
❒ The guides must fit snugly
against both sides of the stack.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Document Feeder
D Press the {Combine} key.
Combine Printing with the
Document Feeder
Reference
⇒ P.61 “Combine Originals” for de-
tails.
2
A Insert the 2 originals face up.
E Select [Combine 2] or [Quadruple]
with the [←][→] or {~} {}} keys.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ The first original will be printed
on the left side of the paper.
F Press the [OK] key.
B Enter the number of prints with
G Press the {Start} key.
the number keys.
C Check the print paper size and the
reproduction ratio.
❒ To have the machine choose a
suitable ratio automatically, use
Auto Magnification mode. ⇒
P.30 “Auto Magnification”.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
H Check the image position of the B Select [Manual] with the [→] or
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
2
❒ After the first original has been
stored, the second original is
fed.
C Press the [OK] key.
❒ If you place only one original,
the beeper sounds after the first
original has been scanned in.
Place the second original and
any print settings you require.
Then press the {Start} key.
D Enter the desired number of
prints for the first original with
the number keys.
Manual Class Mode with Two
or More Originals Using the
Document Feeder
Reference
⇒ P.57 “Manual Class Mode with 2
or More Originals”.
A Press the {Class} key.
F Enter the desired number of
prints for the second original
with the number keys.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Document Feeder
G Press the {q} key.
K Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G for each
original.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
❒ Up to 20 classes can be set.
H Press the [OK] key.
2
L Press the {Auto Cycle} key.
I Place your originals face up in the
document feeder.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ In Auto Cycle mode, printing
starts automatically after a trial
print is delivered.
Note
❒ The originals are fed from the
top of the stack. Make sure that
the originals are placed in the
correct sequence with the first
original on the top.
M Press the {Print} key.
J Press the {Start} key.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
Color Printing Using the Optional Color
Drum
Color drum units are available as op-
tions in addition to the standard black
unit. For making color prints, a sepa-
rate drum unit is necessary for each
color.
Changing the Color Drum Unit
2
B Lower the drum unit lock lever
Note
B1.
❒ If the ink on the color drum dries,
use the Quality Start mode. ⇒ P.74
“Quality Start Mode”.
Making Color Prints
A Make sure that the color drum in-
dicator is lit.
Note
❒ Make sure the green light be-
side the drum unit lock lever is
on before sliding out the drum.
If the light is off, close the front
door, wait for five seconds, and
then open.
B Press the {Start} key.
C Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
D Make your prints.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color Printing Using the Optional Color Drum
C Pull the drum unit handle out F Insert the color drum unit along
slowly (B2).
the guide rail.
2
TPEH290E
G Lower the drum unit lock lever
D Lift the upper drum stay (B3) a lit-
tle to unlock the drum unit, and
then pull out the drum unit while
holding the drum unit handle
(B2) and the upper drum stay (B3).
(B1) of the inserted drum.
H Slide in the drum unit until it
locks in position.
Important
❒ Be careful not to let the drum
unit fall.
E Make sure the optional color
drum lock is securely set.
TPEH091E
I Lift drum unit lock lever B1.
TPEH081E
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
J Close the front door.
B Enter the number of prints with
the number keys.
Note
❒ Make sure that the Open Cover/
Unit indicator turns off, and the
Color Drum indicator turns on.
2
Printing in Two Colors
After printing in one color, you can
print in another color on the same
side of the print.
C Press the {Start} key.
R
R
P
P
GRCOLO0E
Note
❒ Let the ink on the prints dry for a
while before printing on them
again.
D Check the image position of the
trial or proof print.
❒ If the prints are not dry, the paper
feed roller might become dirty. In
this case, wipe the roller with a
cloth.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key (⇒ P.23 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”).
❒ You cannot print in two colors at
one time.
E Press the {Print} key.
A Prepare the two originals. Place
the first original on the exposure
glass.
ZDCH110E
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color Printing Using the Optional Color Drum
F Remove the prints from the paper
delivery tray and place them on
the paper feed tray again as
shown in the illustration.
2
ZDZY010E
G Change the drum unit. ⇒ P.128
“Changing the Color Drum Unit”.
TPEH101E
H Place the second original and
press the {Start} key.
I Check the image position.
J Press the {Print} key.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
Changing the Drum Size
To save costs on master rolls and ink,
you can shorten the length of each
master by changing to an optional
smaller drum.
2
Printing Area (At 23°C/73°F,
65% RH)
❖ Metric version
A3 drum
More than 290 × 410mm,
11.4" × 16.2"
A4 drum
More than 290 × 200mm
❖ Inch version
11" × 17"
drum
More than 290 × 420mm,
11.4" × 16.6"
81/2" × 11"
drum
More than 11.4" × 7.8"
Master Cut Length
A3 drum…320mm × 530mm, 12.5" ×
20.9", 255 masters/roll
11" × 17" drum…320 × 540mm, 12.5" ×
21.3", 245 masters/roll
Optional A4, 81 /2 "
×
11"
drum…320mm × 325mm, 12.5" ×
12.8", 410 masters/roll
Note
❒ For changing the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Combination Chart
Combination Chart
This combination chart shows which modes can be used together.
✩
X
means that these modes can be used together.
means that these modes cannot be used together.
*1
means that these modes cannot be used together (the function chosen sec-
ond takes priority)
*2
means that these modes cannot be used together (the function chosen first
takes priority)
Function chosen second
Letter, Photo, Let- -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 ✩ *1
ter/Photo, Pencil,
Tint mode
Economy mode
Auto Cycle
Preset Reduce/
Enlarge
✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
Zoom
✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
Auto Magnifica- ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1 ✩ *1
tion Selection
Directional Mag- ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
nification (%)
Directional Mag- ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
nification (size)
Combine Origi-
nals (2 Images on
one sheet)
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
Combine Origi-
nals (4 Images on
one sheet)
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
MemoryCombine ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2 *2 ✩ *1
mode
(4 Originals)
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combination Chart
Function chosen second
3
MemoryCombine ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2 *2 ✩ *1
mode
(8 Originals)
MemoryCombine ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2 *2 ✩ *1
mode (16 Origi-
nals)
Edge Erase
All Class mode
Manual Class
mode
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1
Class mode
Job Separation
Overlay
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- -- *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *1
Form
Storage Overlay ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *1
Date Stamp
Page Stamp
Stamp
Repeat
Make-up
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 ✩ -- ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 ✩ ✩ -- ✩ *2 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ -- *2 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 -- *2 *2 ✩ *1
*2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 -- -- ✩ *1
Original Storage *2 ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 -- ✩ ✩ *1
Skip Feed
On Line
Image Rotation
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ --
*2 ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ --
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ X ✩ X ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ X X X X ✩ X
✩
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. User Tools
Accessing the User Tools
The user tools allow you to customize
various default settings. This section
is intended for the machine adminis-
trator.
Note
❒ [Next]: Press to go to the next
page.
❒ [Prev.]: Press to go back to the
A Press the {User Tools} key.
previous page.
B Press the [OK] key.
C Search for the desired user tool
number of each function with
the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
D Press the [OK] key.
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Auto On Line
Make-Up
Using the number keys
ZDZS110N
A Enter the desired user tool
number (1 to 7) with the num-
ber keys.
B Select the desired user tools
menu. ⇒ P.137 “User Tools
Menu”.
Using the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}
key
A Search for the desired user tool
number (1 to 7) with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} key.
B Press the [OK] or {q} key.
C Enter the desired user tool
number of each function with
the number keys.
D Press the [OK] or {q} key.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
C Change the settings by following
the instructions on the panel dis-
play, and then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key before
pressing the [OK] key. Then en-
ter the new value.
❒ [Cancel]: Press to return to the
previous menu without chang-
ing any data.
D Press the {User Tools} key to re-
turn to the standby display.
4
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
Note
❒ The settings are not canceled
even if the main switch is
turned off or the {Clear Modes/
Energy Saver} key is pressed.
❒ You can also return to the stand-
by display by pressing the [Can-
cel] key.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
User Tools Menu
Reference
For accessing the user tools, ⇒ P.135 “Accessing the User Tools”.
1. System
No.
Mode
Description
1
Auto Reset
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after
your job is finished. The automatic reset time can be set from 1 to
5 minutes or off (0 minute).
Note
❒ Default: Off
4
2
R. Cntr. Display
Use to display the total number of masters and prints.
Note
❒ A trial print delivered to the paper delivery tray after press-
ing the {Start} key will not be counted.
3
4
Reset R. Counter Choose whether the total number of masters and prints is reset.
Note
❒ Default: Not clear
mm/inch
Choose the units of measurement shown on the panel display.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Metric version: mm
Inch version: inch
5
6
Language on LCD The language used for panel display messages can be selected.
Note
❒ Default: English
Time Setting
Use to set the machine's internal clock.
Note
❒ The clock must be adjusted if you change the clock to daylight
saving time/summer time, or return to standard time.
Reference
For setting the clock, ⇒ P.150 “1-6 Time Setting”.
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
No.
Mode
Description
7
Data Print
Use to print out the following data.
Note
❒ Available settings:
•
•
•
Log Data (Number of prints made, how many times paper
misfeeds occur and so on.)
Reset Counters (Number of prints and master made under
each user code.)
Store Class (Registered number of students in each class.)
8
Energy Saving
You can set the time until the Energy Saver mode starts.
Note
❒ Default: 3 Min. (minutes)
4
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
2. Set Operat'n Mode
No.
Mode
Description
1
Min. Quantity
The minimum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.
Example: If you specify 20 as minimum number of prints, runs of
20 or more prints will be accepted, print runs of less than 20 prints
will not be accepted.
Note
❒ Default: 0
2
3
Max. Quantity
The maximum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.
Note
❒ Default: 9999
4
CopyCount Dis- The counter can be set to show the number of prints made (Up),
play
or the number of prints left to be made (Down).
Note
❒ Default: Down
5
Panel Beeper
Turns the beeper on or off.
Note
❒ Default: STD. (standard)
❒ Available settings:
•
•
ALL OFF (The beeper does not sound when you press keys
or when warning messages appear on the panel display.)
STD. (When you press a key, the beeper does not sound.
When warning messages appear on the panel display, the
beeper sounds.)
•
ALL ON (The beeper sounds when you press a key or
when warning messages appear on the panel display.)
6
7
LCD Contrast
You can adjust the brightness of the panel display.
Delivery Capaci- You can set the maximum number to make prints.
ty
Note
❒ Default: Yes (1000 sheets)
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
3. Initial Setting
No.
Mode
Description
1
Paper Type
Specifies the paper type at power on.
Note
❒ Default: Std. (Standard)
2
3
4
MSTR Makg.
Density
Specifies the image density at power on.
Note
❒ Default: Std. (Standard)
Original Priority Specifies the original mode at power on.
Note
❒ Default: Letter
4
Reproduct'n Ra- Adjust a fixed reproduction ratio between 50 and 200%.
tio
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Metric version: 71%, 82%, 87%, 93%, 100%, 115%, 122%,
141%
Inch version: 65%, 74%, 77%, 93%, 100%, 121%, 129%,
155%
Reference
For setting the ratios, ⇒ P.150 “3-4 Reproduction Ratio” 3–4 Re-
production ratio.
5
Class Enter No.
Before using All Class or Auto Class mode, register the number
of students in each class with this function.
Note
can have up to 9999 students.
Reference
For registering the number of students, ⇒ P.151 “3-5 Class En-
ter No.” 3–5 Class NO.
6
7
LT/Photo Con-
trast
Specifies the contrast level for Letter/Photo when the power is
switched on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
LT/Photo Priori- Specifies the screen image in Letter/Photo mode when you press
ty
the [Original] key.
Note
❒ Default: Letter
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
No.
Mode
Description
8
Photo Contrast
Specifies the contrast level for Photo when the power is switched
on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
9
Photo(Screen)
Specifies the screen image in Photo mode when you press the
[Original] key.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
10
Eco.Mode ON/
OFF
Specifies whether Economy Mode is set to On or Off when the
power is switched on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: Off
4
11
12
Margin Eras.Area Adjust the erase edges margin.
Note
❒ Default: 2 mm, 0.1"
Ratio Priority
You can set the primary ratio on the display when you press the
[Ratio] key.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
4. Mode Setting
No.
Mode
Description
1
Auto Cycle ON/ Specifies whether Auto Cycle mode is selected at power on.
OFF
Note
❒ Default: ON
2
3
Class Manual Set You can use one original or multiple originals in Manual Class
mode.
Note
❒ Default: Std. (One original)
Ignore Paper Size If you are making prints on non-standard paper and the original
image does not entirely appear on the print, set paper size detec-
tion to “Ignore”. The machine will not detect the paper length.
4
Note
❒ Default: Not to ignore
4
5
6
No Orig. Size DF When you set long originals in the optional document feeder, set
original detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not detect the
original size.
Note
❒ Default: Not to ignore
No Orig. Size
When you place originals of non standard sizes on the exposure
glass, set original detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not de-
tect the original size.
Note
❒ Default: Not to ignore
Background ON/ When you make prints in Photo, Letter/Photo, or Tint mode, the
OFF
background of the prints might become dirty. Turn Background
On to improve the clarity of your prints.
Note
❒ Default: W/O back. correction (off)
7
8
Longer Paper
Combine
You can select whether you can use paper longer than 432mm,
17.0" or not.
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
If you select “Automatic (Auto Combine mode)”, you can make
two or four identical images on one sheet by pressing the {Com-
bine} key and {Start} key.
Note
❒ Default: Normal (Combine Originals mode)
Reference
For using Auto Combine mode, ⇒ P.66 “Auto Combine Mode”.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
No.
Mode
Description
9
Comb. Sep. Line You can select a separation line in Memory Combine mode.
Note
❒ Default: None
❒ Available settings:
a
b
c
d
e
GRLINE0E
•
•
•
•
•
a = None
b = Solid
4
c = Broken1
d = Broken2
e = CropMarks
10
11
Cancel Comb.
Specifies whether Combine Originals or Memory Combine mode
is cleared after finishing your print job.
Note
No. of Skip Feed Specifies the number of drum rotations in Skip Feed mode at
power on. You can also select whether you can change the num-
ber of drum rotations temporarily when you press the {Skip Feed}
key. ⇒ P.68 “Skip Feed Printing”.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Number of Skip Feed: 2
Reference
For changing the number of rotations, ⇒ P.153 “4-11 No. of
Skip Feed”.
12
Idling for Q.start When you use the Manual Quality Start mode, you can select
how many times the drum unit idles.
Note
❒ Default: 7
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
No.
Mode
Description
13
Setting Q.start
If the machine is not used for a long period of time, the ink on the
drum might dry causing image quality to deteriorate. The Auto
Quality Start mode automatically recovers image density quality
after a selected time has passed. If Auto Quality Start mode is set
to “Not to use”, you can regain print quality by making a few ex-
tra prints or you can use the Manual Quality Start mode.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Before print: Yes
After print: Yes
14
No. of Q.start
You can select how many times the drum unit idles after the fol-
lowing time periods have passed in Auto Quality Start mode.
4
Note
❒ Default: ⇒ P.154 “4-14 No. of Q.start”.
drum rotations, and vice versa.
Reference
For changing the number of idle spins, ⇒ P.154 “4-14 No. of
Q.start”.
15
Deflector Angle
You can change the angle of the wing guide depending on the pa-
per type you use.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
❒ Available settings:
•
•
Up (Select this setting when standard thickness or thin pa-
per misfeeds at the paper exit section occur frequently.)
Down (Select this setting when A4 – B5, 81/2" × 11" thick
paper is not delivered properly to the paper delivery tray.)
16
Auto Class
When you do not use the Job Separation mode, you can select the
machine's condition after each printing set is fed out to the paper
delivery tray.
Note
❒ Default: Stop
❒ Available settings:
•
•
Start printing automatically (After the last page of each
printing set is fed out to the paper delivery tray, the ma-
chine stops for a few seconds. Then, the next cycle begins.)
Stop (After the last page of each printing set is fed out to
the paper delivery tray, the machine stops. If you press the
{Print} key, the next cycle begins.)
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
No.
Mode
Description
17
Auto Separate
Specifies whether Job Separation mode is automatically carried
out when you make prints in All Class, Auto Class, Manual Class,
or Class mode.
Note
❒ Default: ON
18
Ink/Master Left
Specifies whether you can check the amount of ink and master.
Note
❒ Default: OFF
❒ Available settings:
•
•
OFF (You cannot check the remaining amount of ink or
master.)
ON (When the remaining amount of ink or master is less
than half, the panel display indicates these amounts when
you turn on the main switch.)
4
•
Check remaining volume (You can see the remaining
amounts of ink and master regardless of these amounts.)
19
20
Type of Paper
Auto Rotation
ister its paper type in “User1” or “User2”.
Reference
For registering a special paper type, ⇒ P.155 “4-19 Type of Pa-
per”.
When the direction in which your original is placed differs from
that of the paper, the machine automatically rotates the original
image by 90° to match the paper direction. You can cancel this
setting.
Note
❒ Default: ON
21
27
Master length
The machine determines the master length according to the num-
ber of originals placed in the optional document feeder and the
paper sizes. If you wish to use A3/11" × 17" master regardless of
the number of originals set and the paper sizes, select “A3”.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
Cancel Stor.O.lay Specifies whether settings for Storage Overlay are retained, or
not, when a storage overlay job has finished.
Note
❒ Default: Not to cancel
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
5. Stamp
No.
Mode
Description
1
Type
You can select the stamp message at power on with the Stamp
mode.
Note
❒ Default: CONFIDENTIAL
2
Size
You can edit the preset stamp sizes.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
❒ Adjustment values:
•
Double size
4
3
4
Stamp Density
Stamp Position
You can select the style of the stamps.
Note
❒ Default: Solid-fill
You can edit the preset stamp position.
Note
❒ Default: ⇒ P.156 “5-4 Stamp Position”.
❒ Available settings: ⇒ P.156 “5-4 Stamp Position”.
Reference
For adjusting the stamp position, ⇒ P.156 “5-4 Stamp Position”.
5
6
Date Style Set
You can select the style of the date stamp.
Note
❒ Default: Month Day Year
Date Position Set You can select the date stamp direction at power on in Date Stamp
mode.
Note
7
Position(Date)
You can edit the date stamp position.
Note
❒ Available settings: ⇒ P.157 “5-7 Position (Date)”.
Reference
For adjusting the date stamp position, ⇒ P.157 “5-7 Position
(Date)”.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
No.
Mode
Description
8
Type(Page)
You can select the page numbering style at power on in Page
Stamp mode.
Note
❒ Default: P1,P2
9
Direction(Page)
You can select the page numbering direction at power on in Page
Stamp mode.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
When you select “P1,P2” or “1/5,2/5” with the
“Type(Page)” user tool: Upper Right
When you select “-1-,-2-” with the “Type(Page)” user tool:
Down Center
4
10
Position(Page)
You can edit the page numbering position.
Note
❒ Available settings: ⇒ P.158 “5-10 Position (Page)”.
Reference
For adjusting the page numbering position, ⇒ P.158 “5-10 Po-
sition (Page)”.
11
Make/Chg. Pat- Make your own background pattern in Make-up mode.
tern
Note
❒ You can edit the 40 preset patterns.
Reference
For changing the background pattern, ⇒ P.159 “5-11 Make/
Chg. Pattern”.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
6. Administrator Mode
❖ User Codes
If user codes are turned on, operators must enter their user codes before they can operate
the machine. The machine keeps count of the number of copies made under each user code.
Turn this function on with the “Set User Code(s)” user tool. You can also turn on Key Op-
erator Code mode so that only the key operator (administrator) can use the functions below.
1
2
Check Counter
Reset Counters
each user code.
Reference
For checking the number of masters and copies, ⇒ P.160 “6-
1 Check Counter”.
You can clear each or all user code counters.
4
Note
❒ Default: Single
Reference
For clearing the number of masters and copies, ⇒ P.161 “6-
3
Set User Code
Selects User Code mode. For details about User Code mode, ⇒
P.148 “6. Administrator Mode” Use Code(s).
Enter the key Operator Code if you have already set it. ⇒ P.148
“6. Administrator Mode”
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
4
5
Reg. User Code
Chg. User Code
You can register user codes.
Note
❒ Up to 20 user codes (up to 4 digits) can be registered.
You can change user codes.
Note
❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added to
that made under the new user code.
Reference
For changing the user codes, ⇒ P.162 “6-5 Chg. User Code”.
6
Del. User Code
You can delete user codes.
Note
❒ The number of copies made under the deleted code is also
deleted.
Reference
For deleting user codes, ⇒ P.162 “6-6 Del. User Code”.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
7
Key Operator Code Use to turn Key Operator Code mode on or off.
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
8
9
Reg/Chg Key-
OpCode
You can register or change key operator codes. (up to 4 digits)
Restrict. Access
In Key Counter mode, you have to set the key counter before
making prints. (To turn on Key Counter mode, contact your
service representative.) If Key Counter mode is on, Restricted
Access is turned on (“To use”) automatically. If you turn Re-
stricted Access off (“Not to use”), you can make prints without
inserting the key counter.
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
4
7. On Line Mode
No.
1
Mode
Description
Set aut-O/L def
Specifies whether Auto On Line mode is set to On or Off when
power is switched on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: On
2
Ppr. Size [Online]
Specifies the paper size when you press the {On Line} key.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
User Tool Menus in Detail
E Press the {q} key.
1-6 Time Setting
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
4
F Enter the month with the number
ZDZS110N
keys.
G Press the {q} key.
B Make sure that “1” is selected,
and then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ Follow steps F and G for the
"date", "hour", "minute", and
"second".
H Press the [OK] key.
3-4 Reproduction Ratio
C Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
D Enter the year with the number
Auto On Line
Make-Up
keys.
ZDZS110N
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
B Enter 3 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
3-5 Class Enter No.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
C Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
4
B Enter 3 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
D Select the ratio you want to adjust
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
C Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
E Press the [Adjust.] key.
F Enter the desired ratio with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
D Select the grade with the [←] [→]
Note
or {~} {}} keys.
❒ You can also enter the ratio with
the number keys.
G Press the [OK] key twice.
E Press the [Enter] key.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
F Select the class with the [←] [→]
3-11 Margin Erase Area
or {~} {}} keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
G Enter the number of students
with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
ZDZS110N
4
B Enter 3 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
C Enter 11 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G until you
have finished registering num-
ber of students in each class.
H Press the [OK] key.
D Select the original size you will
use with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Note
❒ Repeat steps D through H until
you have finished registering
the number of students in each
class for the each grades.
I Press the [OK] key.
E Press the [Select] key.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
F Adjust the erase edge margin.
4-11 No. of Skip Feed
If you selected A3 to A6 or 11" ×
The following procedure explains
how to change the number of drum
rotations.
17" to 51/2" × 81/2"
A Adjust the erase edge margin
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
4
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
Note
B Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
❒ You can also enter the ratio
with the number keys and
the {q} key.
If you selected p
A Enter the erase edge margin
with the number keys.
C Enter 11 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
B Press the {q} key.
C Enter the vertical length with
the number keys.
D Press the [Change] key.
D Press the {q} key.
E Enter the horizontal width
with the number keys.
F Press the {q} key.
G Press the [OK] key twice.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
E Change the number of drum rota- A Press the {User Tools} key.
tions while one sheet of paper is
fed with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
B Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Note
4
❒ You can also change the num-
ber of rotations with the num-
ber keys.
F Press the [OK] key.
C Enter 14 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
4-14 No. of Q.start
Note
❒ The default settings are as follows:
Time period
D Select the temperature at which
you use this machine with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
Low Tmp. *1
0
0
0
7
5
5
7
5
5
7
5
5
*2
Normal Tmp.
*3
High Tmp.
*1
*2
*3
(10 – 15°C, 50 – 59°F)
(15 – 28°C, 59 – 82.4°F)
(28 – 30°C, 82.4 – 86°F)
E Press the [OK] key.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
F Select the time period you want to
change how many times the drum
unit idles with the [←] [→] or {~}
{}} keys.
4-19 Type of Paper
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
G Press the [OK] key.
4
B Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
H Select the number of drum rota-
tions with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
C Enter 19 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
I Press the [OK] key.
D Select [User1] or [User2] with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
E Press the [OK] key.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
Stamp
positions
Default
Available
settings
F Select the paper type and misfeed
condition with the [←] or [→] key.
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
c
0.32" – 4.16"
b
b = 0mm, 0"
b = – 72 –
72mm, –
2.88" – 2.88"
c = center
line
a
GRSPOS4E
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b
b = 8 –
144mm,
G Press the [OK] key.
a
GRSPOS5E
0.32" – 5.76"
H Press the [Cancel] key.
a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –
4
52mm, –
2.08" – 2.08"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b
5-4 Stamp Position
a
c
b = 8 –
144mm,
0.32" – 5.76"
c = center
line
GRSPOS6E
Note
❒ The default position and available
settings of each stamp are as fol-
lows:
a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –
52mm, –
2.08" – 2.08"
b = 0mm, 0"
a
c
c = center
line
Stamp
Default
Available
settings
b
b = – 72 –
72mm, –
positions
GRSPOS7E
2.88" – 2.88"
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
a
a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –
b
52mm, –
2.08" – 2.08"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b
b = 8 –
144mm,
0.32" – 5.76"
c
a
GPSPOS0E
b = 8 –
144mm,
0.32" – 5.76"
c = center
line
GRSPOS8E
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
a
0.32" – 4.16"
A Press the {User Tools} key.
b = 0mm, 0"
b
b = – 72 –
72mm, –
2.88" – 2.88"
c
c = center
line
GRSPOS1E
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
a
Image Density
Stamp
b
On Line
Lighter
b = 24mm,
0.96"
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
b = 8 –
144mm,
GRSPOS2E
Auto On Line
Make-Up
0.32" – 5.76"
ZDZS110N
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b
b = 8 –
a
GRSPOS3E
144mm,
0.32" – 5.76"
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
5-7 Position (Date)
Note
❒ The default position and available
settings of each date stamp are as
follows:
Stamp
positions
Default
Available
settings
C Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
a
dd.mm.yy
b
b = 20mm,
0.80"
b = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
4
GRDPOS0E
D Select the stamp position you
want to adjust with the [←] [→] or
{~} {}} keys.
b
dd.mm.yy
a
GRDPOS1E
a = 20mm,
0.80"
b = 12mm,
0.48"
b
a
GRDPOS2E
a = 20mm,
0.80"
E Press the [Change] key.
a
b
b = 8mm,
0.32"
F Adjust the horizontal stamp posi-
tion with the {|} or {{} key, and
then press the {}} key.
GRDPOS3E
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Note
❒ The value increases or decreases
Image Density
Lighter
in 4mm, 0.16" steps.
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
G Adjust the vertical stamp position
Auto On Line
Make-Up
with the {|} or {{} key.
ZDZS110N
H Press the [OK] key twice.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
5-10 Position (Page)
Note
❒ The default position and available
settings of each page stamp are as
follows:
❖ P1 or 1/5
C Enter 7 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Stamp
positions
Default
Available
settings
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
a
P.1
b
b = 12mm,
0.48"
4
b = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
GRPPOS0E
D Select the date stamp direction
you want to adjust with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
a = 12mm,
0.48"
a
b
b = 12mm,
0.48"
GRPPOS1E
❖ -1-
Stamp
positions
Default
Available
settings
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
E Press the [Change] key.
–1–
a
F Adjust the horizontal date stamp
position with the {|} or {{} key,
and then press the {}} key.
GRPPOS2E
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
a
GRPPOS3E
Note
❒ The value increases or decreases
in 4mm, 0.16" steps.
G Adjust the vertical date stamp po-
sition with the {|} or {{} key.
H Press the [OK] key twice.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
A Press the {User Tools} key.
F Adjust the horizontal page num-
bering position with the {|} or
{{} key, and then press the {}}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
Note
ZDZS110N
❒ The value increases or decreases
in 4mm, 0.16" steps.
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
G Adjust the vertical page number-
ing position with the {|} or {{}
key.
4
Note
❒ You need not follow step G
when you select “-1-” as the di-
rection in step D.
C Enter 10 with the number keys.
Then press the [OK] or {q} key.
H Press the [OK] key twice.
5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern
A Press the {User Tools} key.
D Select the page numbering direc-
tion you want to adjust with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
E Press the [Change] key.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
C
Enter 11 with the number keys, and
then press the [OK] or {q} key.
6-1 Check Counter
A Press the {User Tools} key.
D Select the background pattern
with the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
4
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
E Press the [Change] key.
F Move the cursor to the position
you wish to edit with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} key.
C Make sure that 1 is selected, and
then press the [OK] key.
G Press the {q} or {Clear/Stop} key
to edit the pattern.
Note
❒ The number of masters and
prints made under the first user
code will be displayed in the
panel display.
Note
❒ To add a dot, press the {q} key.
❒ To remove a dot, press the
{Clear/Stop} key.
❒ Repeat steps F and G until you
have finished editing the pat-
tern.
H Press the [OK] key twice.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
D Keep pressing the [→] or {}} key D Select [Single] or [All] with the [←]
to display the number of masters
and prints made under your user
code.
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
E Press the [OK] key.
E Press the [OK] key after checking
the number of masters and prints
made under your user code.
If you selected [Single]
4
A Keep pressing the [→] or {}}
key to display the number of
masters and prints made under
your user code.
6-2 Reset Counters
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
B Press the [OK] key.
Auto On Line
Make-Up
C Press the [Yes] key.
ZDZS110N
D Press the [Cancel] key twice.
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
If you selected [All]
A Press the [Yes] key.
C Enter 2 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
F Enter the new user code with the
6-5 Chg. User Code
number keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
G Press the [OK] key.
4
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
6-6 Del. User Code
A Press the {User Tools} key.
C Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
D Keep pressing the [→] or {}} key
to display your user code.
C Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
E Press the [OK] key.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
D Keep pressing the [→] or {}} key
to display your user code.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Press the [Yes] key.
4
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
4
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Troubleshooting
If Your Machine does not Operate as You
Want
If a malfunction or a misfeed occurs, the following messages will appear on the
panel display.
Message
Meaning
Check the original direc- The paper is not placed in the same direction as the original.
tion.
Place the original in the same direction as the paper.
If you press the {Print} key, the selected paper will be used for printing.
Size of original and pa- Set a paper size that matches the reproduction ratio you have select-
per is not the same.
ed and your original.
The reproduction ratio selected by Auto Magnification mode is too
big or too small.
Note
❒ You can make prints if you press the {Print} key.
Set original.
Make prints after confirming whether there is an original on the ex-
posure glass.
Max. quantity: ****
Min. quantity: ****
The number of prints exceeds the maximum print quantity.
You can change the maximum number of prints that can be made in
The number of prints does not exceed the minimum print quantity.
You can change the minimum number of prints that can be made in
one operation with the user tools. See “Min. Quantity” ⇒ P.139 “2.
Set Operat'n Mode”.
Drum unit is not set. Set Slide in the drum until it clicks.
Drum unit.
Make sure that the drum is completely set in position.
Communication error
Turn the main switch off and on.
then on
Over loaded for the de- Remove the paper from the delivery tray.
livery tray
Reference
Please remove the paper
See “Delivery Capacity” ⇒ P.139 “2. Set Operat'n Mode”.
Print image is larger
The master image previously printed is larger than the paper, the im-
than the selected paper age overflows the paper size.
size.
Make prints again after pressing the [Exit] key and selecting the pa-
per size again.
Change the paper size.
Note
❒ If you press the [Exit] key to disappear the message and press the
{Print} key, the machine starts to make the prints. However, the
image might not fit on the paper.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
-When a service call message is shown on the panel display
Press the [Exit] key. Then turn the main switch off and back on again. If a service
code appears again, contact your service representative.
Note
❒ If a service code appears on the panel display after you turn the main switch
off and on a few times, do not continue turning it on and off. Leave the ma-
chine off.
❒ When you make masters continuously using originals with solid images,
“SC-03-03” tends to appear on the panel display. In this case, turn off the main
switch and wait for a while. Then turn on the main switch.
5
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Cannot Make Prints as You Want
If You Cannot Make Prints as You Want
Problem
Cause
Action
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Improper paper type is select- Select proper paper type. ⇒
ed.
P.41 “Printing onto Various
Kinds of Paper”.
When you try to set several
functions at a time, you can-
not set some functions.
Some functions cannot be
used together.
Parts of the image are not
printed in Edge Erase mode.
Erase margin is too wide.
Set a narrower erase margin
with the user tools. ⇒ P.152
“3-11 Margin Erase Area”.
Edge margins of original are
too narrow.
Prints are blank or parts of the The paper feed side plates are Make sure that the paper feed
image are not printed.
not set correctly.
side plates touch the paper
lightly and the proper paper
size is displayed in the panel
display.
5
2nd printing with another
drum is unsatisfactory.
The 1st print image is still wet. Wait until the 1st image be-
comes dry.
An uneven solid image ap-
pears.
Large solid image wrinkles
the master.
Increase the print speed or se-
lect photo mode.
Combine Originals Mode
Problem
Cause
Action
Prints are blank or parts of the Original size and direction are You cannot use originals of
image are not printed.
not correct.
different sizes and directions
in Combine Originals mode.
Use originals of same size and
direction.
Print image is not correct.
Original set order is not cor-
rect.
Place originals face up into the
optional document feeder.
The first original should be on
the top.
Place original face down on
the exposure glass. The first
original should be set first.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Loading Paper
The Load Paper indicator (B) lights
when the paper feed tray runs out of
paper.
C Adjust the paper feed side plates
to match the paper size.
Limitation
❒ Load paper when the paper feed
tray is empty. Do not add paper
when some paper is left in the tray.
Doing so may cause multiple feeds
or misfeeds.
Reference
ZDCY030E
For available paper sizes, ⇒ P.11
“Print Paper”.
D Push the lock lever for the paper
feed side plates down to lock the
side plates into position.
A Raise the lock lever for the paper
feed side plates to release the
lock.
5
ZDCY041E
ZDCY061E
Note
❒ Make sure that the paper size
and direction shown on the
panel display match the size
and direction of paper loaded in
the paper feed tray.
B Load the paper in the paper feed
tray.
ZDCY020E
Note
❒ Correct any paper curl before
loading the paper.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
x Clearing Misfeeds
R CAUTION:
”x + A” Paper Misfeeds in the
Paper Feed Section
• Be careful not to cut
yourself on any sharp
edges when you
reach inside the ma-
chine to remove mis-
fed sheets of paper or
masters.
A Remove the misfed paper.
Note
❒ After clearing misfeeds, make sure
that all the doors, covers, and units
are closed and the x indicator is
off.
5
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave
any torn scraps of paper, originals,
or masters in the machine.
Check the following before restarting
the printing run.
❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not
turn off the main switch. If you do,
your print settings will be cleared.
• Did you select an appropriate pa-
per type with the [Ppr.Type] key?
❒ If misfeeds occur repeatedly,
please contact your service repre-
sentative.
• Are the side pads in the correct po-
sitions?
ZDCY140E
To print on thin paper (47.1g/m2,
12.5 lb), slide the levers behind the
paper feed side plates in the direc-
tion of the arrow (see illustration).
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
• When paper is curled, correct the
curl as shown.
”x + A + B” Paper Misfeeds in
the Paper Feed Section
A Open the front door.
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
B1
Z066
• When paper edges stick together
or paper is not fed in, shuffle the
paper as shown.
C Take out the drum.
5
B2
Z067
B3
B2
• When printing onto postcards or
thick paper, lower the printing
speed to setting 1 or 2. ⇒ P.26
“Changing the Printing Speed”.
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
D Pull out the misfed paper gently
from the inside.
• When a multi-feed occurs or the
paper is skewed, make sure that
the paper feed side plates are prop-
erly adjusted. When you load pa-
per on the paper feed tray, make
sure that the paper edge touches
the back fence and paper is placed
on the proper paper size scale.
Only use paper where the leading
edge has two right angle corners.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
E If you cannot remove the misfed C Take out the drum.
paper, remove paper from the pa-
per feed tray.
B2
B3
B2
F Set the drum unit and close the
front door.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, ⇒
Note
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
❒ For taking out the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
Unit”
5
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
D While pressing the drum lock,
grasp the edge of the master (the
white area) and peel it off.
⇒ P.169 “”x + A” Paper Misfeeds in
the Paper Feed Section”.
”x + B” Paper or Master
Wrapped around the Drum
E Return the drum lock to its origi-
When the master is wrapped around the
drum
nal position.
F Set the drum unit and close the
A Open the front door.
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”
B1
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
F Set the drum unit and close the
When paper is wrapped around the drum
A Open the front cover.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”
B Lower drum unit lock lever B1.
B1
When paper is misfed inside the machine
A Open the front cover.
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
C Take out the drum.
B1
B2
5
C Take out the drum.
B3
B2
B2
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
B3
B2
D Remove the misfed paper from
the drum.
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
E If you cannot find misfed paper
in step D, remove misfed paper
from the pressure cylinder.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
D Remove the misfed paper from
the inside as shown in the illus-
tration.
E If you cannot remove the misfed
paper, remove paper from the
pressure cylinder.
*: Less than 8mm, 0.32"
F Set the drum unit and close the
front door.
Note
”x + C” Paper Misfeeds in the
Paper Exit Section
5
❒ For setting the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”
A Slowly, but firmly pull out the
misfed paper.
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
If the paper is curled or the original's
leading edge margin is too narrow,
the following action is necessary.
• When you use curled paper, cor-
rect the curl as shown.
per exit section, reduce the printing
speed with the {W}{V} {Speed} keys
(⇒ P.26 “Changing the Printing
Speed”). If you cannot reduce the
printing speed, close the trailing edge
guides or move the end plate toward
the paper delivery tray edge.
Z066
• When the leading edge margin of
the original is less than 8mm, 0.32"
or there is a solid image on the
leading edge, insert the original
with the widest margin first or
make a leading edge margin by
making a copy.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
G Insert the paper edge of the mas-
ter roll as shown in the illustra-
tion until the master edge reaches
the arrow mark.
”x + D” Master Misfeeds in
the Master Feed Section
A Pull out the master tray until it
stops.
B Open the master guide.
H Close the master guide.
C Open the master tray cover (1).
5
D Remove the master roll (2).
I Push in the master tray until it
stops.
2
1
”x + D + B” Master Misfeeds
in the Master Feed Section
E Reset the master roll (1).
A Open the front door.
Note
❒ The master roll must be posi-
tioned as shown in the illustra-
tion in step F.
B Lower drum unit look lever (B1).
F Close the master tray cover (2).
B1
1
2
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
C Take out the drum.
”x + B + E” Master Misfeed in
the Master Eject Section
B2
A Open the front door.
B Lower drum unit lock lever B1.
B3
B2
B1
C Take out the drum.
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
5
B2
D Pull out the misfed master from
inside.
B3
B2
E Set the drum unit and close the
Note
front door.
❒ For taking out the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”
D Grasp handle (E1) and pull out
the master eject unit until it stops.
E 1
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
E Pull out lever (E3) and remove the
”x + E” Master Misfeeds in
the Master Eject Section
misfed master.
A Open the front door.
E3
B Grasp handle (E1) and pull out
the master eject unit until it stops.
E 1
C Check where the misfed master
F Return lever (E3) and the master
eject unit to their original posi-
tion.
is. Remove the misfed master.
5
G Set the drum unit and close the
front door.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, ⇒
P.128 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”
D Return the master eject unit to its
original position and close the
front door.
-If master misfeeds often occur
If the master misfeed occurs often,
turn scraps of the master might be left
in the bottom of the master tray. Re-
move turn scraps of the master.
A Slide out the master tray.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
B Open the black cover at the bot- B Pull out the misfed original gen-
tom of the master tray and remove
turn scraps of the master.
tly.
ZDCY120E
C If you cannot remove misfed orig-
inal in step B, open the document
feeder.
C Close the black cover and slide in
the master tray.
D Pull the green knob towards you
5
Note
and remove the misfed original.
❒ Make sure that you securely
close the black cover before slid-
ing in the master tray.
”x + P” Original Misfeeds
Occur When Using the
Optional Document Feeder
TPEH220E
A Open the document feeder (ADF)
E Return the document feed sheet
cover.
to its original position.
F Close the document feeder (ADF)
cover until it clicks in position
and if necessary, close the docu-
ment feeder.
ZDCY090E
ZDCY100E
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
-To prevent original misfeeds:
Placing the following kinds of origi-
nals on the exposure glass.
• Originals heavier than 128g/m2, 34
lb
• Originals lighter than 52g/m2, 14
lb
• Originals smaller than 148mm ×
210mm, 5.9" × 8.3"
• Originals larger than 297mm ×
864mm, 11.6" × 34.0"
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased origi-
5
nals
• Originals with any kind of coating,
such as thermal fax paper, art pa-
per, aluminum foil, carbon paper,
or conductive paper
• Bound originals such as books
• Damaged originals
• Originals with glue on them
• Pasted originals
• Originals written in pencil
• Thin originals that have low stiff-
ness
• Originals with index tabs
• Transparent originals such as OHP
transparencies or translucent pa-
per
Note
❒ Do not mix different sizes of origi-
nals in the optional document
feeder.
❒ Remove staples or clips of origi-
nals. Fan originals that have had
staples or clip removed.
❒ Do not stack originals above the
limit mark.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M) Lights
When the Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M)
Lights
MMake sure that the following
doors/covers are closed.
❖ Front door
Close the front door completely.
5
ZDZH080E
❖ Optional document feeder (ADF) cov-
er
Close the document feeder (ADF)
cover until it locks in position.
ZDCY100E
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When the Add Ink Indicator (j) Lights
The Add Ink indicator (j) lights when it is time to supply ink.
R CAUTION:
• If ink comes into contact with your eyes, rinse immediately in running water.
In the case of any abnormal symptoms, consult a doctor.
R CAUTION:
• Keep the ink or ink container out of the reach of children.
R CAUTION:
• If ink is ingested, force vomiting by drinking a strong saline solution and con-
sult a doctor immediately.
R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-
able at an authorized dealer.
5
Note
❒ Be sure to supply ink of the same color as the current drum.
❒ Ink is readily removed from skin by waterless hand cleaners followed by
washing with soap and water.
❒ Be careful not to get any ink on your clothing.
❒ Store ink under low temperature and humidity conditions.
❒ Do not store ink where it will be exposed to heat or direct sunlight.
❒ Store on a flat surface.
A Open the front door.
B Pull out the ink holder.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Add Ink Indicator (j) Lights
C Remove the used ink cartridge.
D Remove the cap of the new ink cartridge.
5
E Insert the new cartridge into the ink holder.
Note
❒ Always supply ink of the same color.
F Return the ink holder to its original position until it clicks.
G Close the front door.
The machine will start idling to supply ink to the drum.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When the Master End Indicator (C) Lights
The Master End indicator (C) lights when it is time to replace the master roll or
when you need to set the master roll.
R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you only use the expendable supplies avail-
able at an authorized dealer.
A Pull out the master feed unit until it stops.
B Open the master guide.
5
C Open the master feed unit cover (1).
D Remove the used master roll (2).
2
1
Note
❒ When the Master End indicator is lit, it is necessary to replace the master
roll even if some master remains on the old roll.
E The new master roll must be positioned as shown in the illustration (1).
F Close the master feed unit cover (2).
1
2
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Master End Indicator (C) Lights
G Insert the paper edge of the master roll as shown in the illustration until the
master edge reaches the arrow mark.
H Close the master guide.
5
I Push in the master feed unit until it stops.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When the Master Eject Indicator (k) Lights
The Master Eject indicator (k) lights
F Remove the used master by push-
when it is time to empty the master
ing down the master eject unit up-
eject unit or when you need to set the
per handle towards the trash box
master eject unit.
(2).
Note
❒ Ink is readily removed from skin
by waterless hand cleaners fol-
lowed by washing with soap and
water.
❒ Be careful not to get any ink on
your clothing while emptying the
master eject unit.
Note
❒ If you cannot remove the used
masters completely, repeat step
F until all the masters are re-
moved.
A Prepare the trash box.
B Open the front door.
5
C Grasp handle E1 and pull out the
G Reinstall the master eject unit un-
master eject unit until it stops.
til it clicks in position.
H Close the front cover.
E1
D Pull up handle E2 and pull out the
master eject unit completely.
1
E
2
E 1
2
E Grasp the master eject unit upper
handle and turn it clockwise with
one hand while holding handle
E1 with other hand (1).
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Other Indicators are Lit
When Other Indicators are Lit
Indicator
Meaning and action
The key counter (option) is not set. Insert the key counter.
TPES270E
•
•
(Metric version)
Color drum unit is installed.
A3 A4
TPES280E
(Inch version)
m
81/2 Color
TPES280N
•
•
(Metric version)
A3/11" × 17" drum unit is set.
A3 A4
TPES290E
5
(Inch version)
Drum
17 81/2 Co
TPES290N
A4/81/2" × 11" drum unit is set.
•
•
(Metric version)
A3 A4
TPES300E
(Inch version)
Drum
17 81/2 Co
TPES300N
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When Prints are not Delivered in a Neat
Stack
B Re-adjust the paper feed side
When Printing on Small Size
plates so that there is no space be-
Paper
tween the paper feed side plates
and paper, and then lock the side
plates in position.
A Adjust the end plate angle by
turning the screw clockwise or
counterclockwise.
5
ZDCY030E
Note
ZDCH150E
❒ Make sure that the paper size
and direction in the panel dis-
play match the actual paper size
and direction place on the paper
feed tray.
When the Machine Cannot
Detect the Paper Size
❒ If the paper on the paper feed
tray has a solid image on its
back side, the machine may not
be able to detect the size correct-
ly. Place a sheet of paper of the
same size without an image on
the back at the bottom of the pa-
per stack.
If the paper size is not detected cor-
rectly when printing, prints might not
be delivered in a neat stack. To solve
this, do one of the following:
A Raise the lock lever for the paper
feed side plates to release the
lock.
ZDCY111E
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Poor Printing
Poor Printing
Dirty Background
If the background of prints is dirty, the drum unit might be dirty.
R CAUTION:
• If ink comes into contact with your eyes, rinse immediately in running water.
In the case of any abnormal symptoms, consult a doctor.
R CAUTION:
• Keep the ink or ink container out of the reach of children.
R CAUTION:
• If ink is ingested, force vomiting by drinking a strong saline solution and con-
sult a doctor immediately.
5
Note
❒ To avoid getting dirty background prints when printing onto paper smaller
than the original image, select a suitable reduction ratio or use larger print pa-
per.
❒ When printing onto paper that does not absorb ink well, like postcards, the
background of prints might get dirty. In this case, lower the printing speed or
use Skip Feed mode to dry the ink on the prints.
A Turn off the main switch.
TPEH020E
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
B Pull out the drum unit.
TPEH101E
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit, ⇒ P.128 “Changing the Color Drum Unit”.
C While pressing the drum lock, turn the drum until you can see the trailing
edge of the master.
5
D With a dry soft cloth, remove any ink that has accumulated on the trailing
edge of the drum unit.
Important
❒ Do not use benzine, thinner, or other organic liquids—doing so can dam-
age the machine.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Poor Printing
E Turn the drum unit and lock it after cleaning it.
F Insert the drum unit until it locks in position, and then lower the drum unit
lock lever.
5
TPEH091E
G Close the front door.
H Turn on the main switch.
TPEH021E
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Check the exposure glass and clean it if dirty. ⇒ P.195 “Cleaning the exposure
glass”.
Check the sheet of the optional document feeder and clean it if dirty. ⇒ P.196
“Cleaning the Sheet”.
Note
❒ When black lines or stains still appear on prints even if you clean the above,
please contact your service representative.
Faint Prints
If the machine is not used for a long period of time or you change the color drum
unit, the ink on the drum might dry causing print quality to deteriorate. To solve
this problem, use Quality Start mode. ⇒ P.74 “Quality Start Mode”.
5
If the print density is still too light even if you use Quality Start mode, remake
the master.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remarks
Do's and Don'ts
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
Important
❒ Make sure that m indicator on the PC controller operation panel is off before
unplugging the power cord.
• While printing, do not turn off the main switch.
• While printing, do not unplug the power cord.
• While printing, do not open the door or covers.
• While printing, do not move the machine.
• Open and close the door and covers softly.
• When printing onto paper that contains images on the back, make sure there
is a 10mm (0.4") margin at the back leading edge. If there is no margin, the ma-
chine might wrongly detect that paper is wrapped around the drum and stop
printing.
• When you use envelope or pasted print paper, the leading edge of print might
be damaged.
• Make sure to make a few trial prints to check the image position because the
image position of the trial print might not correspond with that of the origi-
nal.
• The leading edge of the prints might become stained if the edge touches the
image of prints on the paper delivery tray.
• Print ink on the paper delivery tray might stick to the back side of the next
print.
• Press the {Proof} key to perform a test print as the image density of the first
few prints might be light.
• When the machine is on and the power source is less than 90% of the specified
amount, printing quality will decrease. Therefore, make sure the supply from
your electrical outlet is at least 90% of the required amount.
• When you make a lot of prints from a small image, ink might ooze out from
the edges of the master, especially under high temperature and when print-
ing in two or more colors. In this case, make a new master.
• Remove the paper from the tray before relocating the machine. If you relocate
the machine leaving the paper on the tray, reset the paper after the relocation.
If the main switch of the machine is turned on without resetting the paper cor-
rectly, the sensor might be broken.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarks
• If the printed paper is stored for more than one day, the paper may become
wrinkled. If this paper is used, wrinkles may also appear on the master. If the
paper will be stored for more than one day, store it in its original wrapping
paper or other protective covering.
• Shadowing may occur if the printed image at the rear edge of the paper is a
solid color, when the printing speed is set to 1. If this occurs, print the image
with the printing speed set to 3.
• If there are fine lines within 5mm to 10mm, 0.2" to 0.4" of the edge of the im-
age, shadowing may occur.
• Depending on the type of paper being used, speckles may appear within
5mm to 10mm, 0.2" to 0.4" of the edge of the image at around 1000 prints.
6
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put Your Machine
Where to Put Your Machine
Environment
Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental con-
ditions greatly affect its performance.
Optimum environmental conditions
R CAUTION:
• Keep the equipment away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an
electric shock might occur.
• Do not place the equipment on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples
over, it could cause injury.
R CAUTION:
• If you use the equipment in a confined space, make sure there is a continu-
ous air turnover.
6
R CAUTION:
• After you move the equipment, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Other-
wise the equipment might move or come down to cause a personal injury.
• Temperature: 10 – 30°C, 50 – 86°F
• Humidity: 20 – 90% RH
• A strong and level floor.
• The machine must be level within 5mm, 0.2" both front to rear and left to
right.
Environments to avoid
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1500 lux).
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air
from a heater (sudden temperature changes might cause condensation within
the machine).
• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.
• Dusty areas.
• Areas with corrosive gases.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarks
Power Connection
R WARNING:
• Only connect the machine to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
than necessary. These actions could cause an electric shock or fire.
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will
not be damaged under the equipment.
R CAUTION:
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
6
Machine Clearance
Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
❖ Main frame
*.Paper delivery tray
1.More than 10cm, 4.0"
2.More than 60cm, 23.7"
3.More than 60cm, 23.7"
4.More than 60cm, 23.7"
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining Your Machine
Maintaining Your Machine
To maintain high print quality, clean
the following parts and units regular-
ly.
Cleaning the platen cover
A Lift the platen cover.
❖ Cleaning the machine
B Clean the platen cover with a
damp cloth and wipe it with a dry
cloth.
Wipe the machine with a soft,
damp cloth. Then wipe it with a
dry cloth to remove the water.
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or or-
ganic solvent, such as thinner or
benzene. If they get into the ma-
chine or melt plastic parts, a failure
might occur.
❒ Do not clean parts other than those
specified in this manual. Such
parts should be cleaned by your
service representative.
AM1P0100
6
Note
❒ If you do not clean the platen
cover, marks on the cover will
be printed.
Cleaning the Main Frame
Cleaning the paper feed roller (Paper
feed tray)
Cleaning the exposure glass
A Lift the platen cover or document
A Wipe off the paper dust on the pa-
per feed roller with a damp cloth,
and then wipe it with a dry cloth.
feeder.
B Clean A and B.
TPEH120E
ZDCH130E
Note
❒ If you do not clean the paper
feed roller, paper misfeeds tend
to occur.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarks
Cleaning the Optional
Document Feeder
Cleaning the Sheet
A Lift the document feeder.
B Clean the sheet with a damp cloth
and wipe it with a dry cloth.
AM1D600
6
Note
❒ If you do not clean the sheet,
marks on the sheet will be print-
ed.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Specifications
Main Frame
❖ Configuration:
Floor standing (with custom table or cabinet).
❖ Printing Process:
Full automatic one drum system
❖ Original Type:
Sheet/Book
❖ Original Size:
Maximum 300mm × 432mm, 11.9" × 17.0"
❖ Pixel Density:
600dpi
❖ Image Mode:
Photo mode
Letter mode
Letter/Photo mode
Pencil mode
Tint mode
❖ Reduction Ratios:
• Inch version:
93%, 77%, 74%, 65%
• Metric version:
93%, 87%, 82%, 71%
❖ Enlargement Ratios:
• Inch version:
155%, 129%, 121%
• Metric version:
141%, 122%, 115%
❖ Zoom:
From 50% to 200% in 1% steps
❖ Directional Magnification:
• Vertical:
From 50% to 200% in 1% steps
• Horizontal:
From 50% to 200% in 1% steps
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
❖ Printing Area:
• A3 drum:
• Inch version: More than 290 × 420mm, 11.4" × 16.6"
• Metric version: More than 290mm × 410mm, 11.4" × 16.2"
• A4 drum:
More than 290mm × 200mm, 11.4" × 7.8"
❖ Print Paper Size:
Maximum: 297mm × 432mm, 11.6" × 17.0"
Minimum: 70mm × 148mm, 2.8" × 5.9"
❖ Leading Edge Margin:
Less than 8mm, 0.32"
❖ Print Paper Weight:
• 47.1 – 209.3g/m2, 12.5 – 55.6 lb
❖ Print Speed:
60 – 120rpm (5 steps)
❖ First Copy Time (Master Process Time):
Less than 31 seconds (A3, 11" × 17"L)
Less than 25 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11"K)
7
❖ Second Copy Time (First Print Time):
Less than 32 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")
Less than 26.5 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11")
❖ Color Printing:
Drum unit replacement system
❖ Image Position:
• Vertical:
• Inch version: 10mm, 0.4"
• Metric version: 15mm, 0.6"
• Side:
10mm, 0.4" (for either side)
❖ Paper Size and Paper Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Paper Delivery Tray Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Frame
❖ Master Eject Unit Capacity:
• A3 drum
More than 70 masters
• A4 drum
100 masters
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
Width
Depth
Height
Stored
625mm, 24.6"
650mm, 25.6"
650mm, 25.6"
575mm, 22"
Stored with docu-
ment feeder
625mm, 24.6"
684mm, 26.9"
Set up
1,405mm, 55.4"
1,405mm, 55.4"
1,215mm, 47.8"
650mm, 25.6"
650mm, 25.6"
650mm, 25.6"
575mm, 22"
Set up with cabinet
1,010mm, 39.8"
1,120mm, 44.1"
Set up with cabinet
anddocument feeder
(when you use A4,
81/2" × 11" or smaller
paper)
Set up with cabinet
anddocument feeder
(when you use B4,
1,405mm, 55.4"
650mm, 25.6"
1,120mm, 44.1"
81/2" × 14" or larger
7
paper)
❖ Weight:
• Machine:
Less than 105kg, 231.5 lb
❖ Noise Emission *1
Sound power level
Mainframe only
Stand-by
--
During printing
120cpm
Sound pressure level *2
Mainframe only
Stand-by
During printing
*1
--
120cpm
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value.
It is measured at the position of the operator.
*2
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
❖ Power Consumption:
• Making a master:
Less than 0.26kW
• Printing:
Less than 0.25kW
❖ Optional Equipment:
• Drum unit: Color Drums
A3, 11" × 17"
A4, 81/2" × 11"
• Key Counter
• Document Feeder
• PC Controller
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
7
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Feeder (Option)
Document Feeder (Option)
❖ Original Type:
Sheet
❖ Original Weight:
52.3g/m2 to 127.9g/m2, 13.9 lb to 34 lb
❖ Original Size:
Max. 297mm × 420mm, 11.6" × 16.5"
Min. 149mm × 210mm, 5.9" × 8.3"
❖ First Copy Time (Master Process Time):
Less than 34 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")
Less than 28.5 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11")
❖ Second Copy Time (First Print Time):
Less than 35 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")
Less than 30 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11")
❖ Original Capacity:
50 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
7.5mm, 0.3" height
7
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Twin Color Press Roller Printing System TC-
II (Option)
❖ Configuration:
Floor standing (with custom table or cabinet)
❖ Printing Process:
Twin color press roller printing system
❖ Print Paper Size:
Maximum: 297mm × 432mm, 11.6" × 17.0"
Minimum: 70mm × 250mm, 2.8" × 9.8"
❖ Print Paper Weight:
• 52.3 – 209.3g/m2, 13.9 – 55.6 lb
❖ Print Speed:
90–120cpm (3 steps)
❖ Color Printing:
Drum unit replacement system
❖ Paper Size and Paper Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
7
❖ Paper Delivery Tray Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H):
Width
Depth
Height
Stored
Set up
920 mm, 36.2"
1,610 mm, 63.4"
630 mm, 24.8"
630 mm, 24.8"
555 mm, 21.9"
555 mm, 21.9"
❖ Weight:
• Machine:
Less than 88kg, 194 lb
❖ Power Consumption:
• Printing:
0.55kW(Max)
❖ Optional Equipment:
• Drum unit: color Drums
A3, 11" × 17"
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consumables
Consumables
Name
Size
Remarks
Master:
Length: 140m, 520ft/roll
A3 drum
Width: 320mm, 12.6" 2 Rolls/case
More than 255 masters can be made
per roll
A4 drum
410 masters can be made per roll
Ink-Black
1,000ml/pack
1,000ml/pack
Environmental conditions: -5 to
40°C 10 – 95% RH
Ink-Red
Ink-Blue
Ink-Green
Ink-Brown
Ink-Purple
Ink-Yellow
Ink-Navy
Ink-Maroon
Ink-Teal
Ink-Orange
Ink-Gray
7
Ink-Violet
Ink-Hunter green
Ink-Burgundy
Ink-Gold
High Density
Ink-Black
High Density
Ink-Blue
High Density
Ink-Green
High Density
Ink-Reflex Blue
High Density
Ink-Red
High Density
Ink-Navy
High Density
Ink-Teal
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
C
{W} {V} keys (Speed keys), 6
{~}{}}{|}{{}, 6
Cancel, 8
changing the printing speed, 26
Chg. User Code, 148, 162
{Class} key, 6
Class mode, 59
{Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key, 6
closed area method, 90
color drum indicator, 7
color printing, 128
16 single-sided originals →
1 single-sided print of 16 images, 114
1 single-sided original →
1 single-sided print of 2 images, 66
1 single-sided originals →
1 single-sided print of 4 images, 66
2 single-sided originals →
1 single-sided print with 2 images, 61
2 single-sided originals →
1 single-sided print with 4 images, 61
4 single-sided originals →
1 single-sided print of 4 images, 114
8 single-sided originals →
Combine printing with the document
A
A3/11" × 17" drum indicator, 7
A3/11" × 17" drum unit, 185
A4/81/2" × 11" drum indicator, 7
A4/81/2" × 11" drum unit, 185
accessing the user tools, 135
Add Ink Indicator (j), 180
Administrator Mode, 148
All Class mode, 50
Auto Class, 144
Auto Class mode, 52
Auto Combine mode, 66
Auto Cycle, 49
{Auto Cycle} key, 6
Auto Magnification, 30
{Auto On Line} key, 5
Auto Quality Start, 74
Auto Reset, 137
Auto Rotation, 145
Auto Separate, 145
Direction(Page), 147
drum unit, 3
drum unit handle B2, 129
B
Background ON/OFF, 142
background patterns, 85
black line/stain, 190
drum unit lock lever B1, 3
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
Eco.Mode ON/OFF, 141
Language on LCD, 137
LCD Contrast, 139
Letter mode, 44
Economy mode, 48
{Economy Mode} key, 5
Edge Erase, 40
{Edge Erase} key, 5
Energy Saver mode, 22
envelopes, 41
environment, 193
erasing center and edge margins, 39
Exit, 8
Loading Paper, 15
loading paper, 168
Load Paper indicator (B), 168
Longer Paper, 142
LT/Photo Contrast, 140
LT/Photo Priority, 140
exposure glass, 3
machine clearance, 194
machine exterior, 1
machine interior, 2
F
flip up cover, 1
Format, 104
front door, 1
maintaining your machine, 195
Make/Chg. Pattern, 147, 159
{Make-Up} key, 5
H
handle E1, 2
I
Idling for Q.start, 143
Ignore Paper Size, 142
{Image Density} key, 5
Image Rotation, 81
indicators, 7
Initial Setting, 140
ink, 180, 203
ink holder, 3
Manual Class mode with two or more
Master Eject indicator (k), 184
Master End Indicator (C), 182
master tray, 1
Ink/Master Left, 145
J
Job Separation, 76
{Job Separator} key, 5
mm/inch, 137
K
Mode Setting, 142
monitor indicators, 7
MSTR Makg. Density, 140
Key counter, 4, 185, 200
Key Operator Code, 149
keys, 5
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Prev., 8
{Print} key, 6
N
Next, 8
No. of Q.start, 144, 154
No. of Skip Feed, 143, 153
No Orig. Size, 142
Number keys, 6
O
OK, 8
{On Line} key, 5
On Line Overlay, 104
operation panel, 1, 5
optional document feeder, 123
options, 4, 200, 201
original misfeeds, 177
Original mode, 44
Original Priority, 140
originals, 13, 123
reducing and enlarging using preset
Overlay, 104
{Overlay} key, 5
P
Page Stamp, 109
Panel Beeper, 139
panel display, 7, 8
panel display layout, 9
paper alignment wings, 2
paper delivery end plate, 2
paper delivery tray, 2
paper feed side plates, 1
Paper feed tray, 1
paper misfeeds in the paper feed
section, 169, 170
Paper Type, 41, 42, 43, 140
PC controller, 79, 105
Pencil mode printing, 47
Photo Contrast, 141
Size, 146
Photo mode printing, 45
Photo(Screen), 141
platen cover, 3
{Skip Feed} key, 5
Skip Feed printing, 68
special feature indicator, 7
special kinds of paper, 42
poor printing, 187
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
specifications, 197
Stamp, 112, 146
Stamp Density, 146
{Stamp} key, 5
Stamp Position, 146, 156
standard paper, 41
standard printing, 19
{Start} key, 6
stopping a multi-print run, 27
Storage Overlay, 104
storing a program, 70
System, 137
T
thick paper, 41
Tint Mode, 25
trailing edge guides, 3
troubleshooting, 165
Type, 146
Type(Page), 147
U
user code, 18, 148
user tools, 135
{User Tools} key, 5
user tools menu, 137
W
where to put your machine, 193
Z
Zoom, 33
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
208
UE USA C235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Instructions
For safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it
handy for future reference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type for 5499/LDD 180/JP8500/3460DNP
Printed in Japan
UE USA C244-8697A
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This manual describes detailed instructions on the operation and notes about the use of this machine.
To get maximum versatility from this machine all operators are requested to read this manual carefully
and follow the instructions. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Notes:
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
Two kinds of size notation are employed in this manual. With this machine refer to the inch version.
For good print quality, the supplier recommends that you use genuine master and ink from the supplier.
The supplier shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of parts
other than genuine parts from the supplier with your office products.
Power Source
120V, 60Hz, 2.4A or more
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. For details about power source,
see p.200 “Power Connection”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note to users in the United States of America
Notice:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursu-
ant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television re-
ception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Note to users in Canada
Note:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Remarque concernant les utilisateurs au Canada
Avertissement:
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main switch:
a means POWER ON.
b means POWER OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be fol-
lowed.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
R WARNING:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
R CAUTION:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
R WARNING:
• Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an ex-
tension cord.
• Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the
power cable or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
• To avoid hazardous electric shock, do not remove any covers or
screws other than those specified in this manual.
• Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cable) if any of the following occurs:
• You spill something into the machine.
• You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
• The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R CAUTION:
• Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
• When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the
plug (not the cable).
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside
the machine.
• For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the machine or expended
supply waste at household waste collection points. Disposal can take place
at an authorized dealer.
• Be careful not to cut yourself on any sharp edges when you reach inside the
machine to remove misfed sheets of paper or masters.
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies avail-
able at an authorized dealer.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
In this manual, the following symbols are used:
R WARNING:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-
scribed in the Safety Information section.
R CAUTION:
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety
Information section.
* The statements above are notes for your safety.
Important
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.
Preparation
This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations required before op-
erating the machine.
Note
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after misop-
eration.
Limitation
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.
{
}
Keys built into the machine's operation panel.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Prints
Before making prints using this ma-
chine, you have to make a master by
pressing the {Start} key. When you
press the {Start} key, the machine
scans the original image and makes a
master. This procedure describes
how to make basic prints.
B Press the {Start} key.
A Place your originals in one of the
following two ways:
Placing originals on the exposure
glass
C Press the {Proof} key.
A Place a single page face down.
Check the print image.
ZDCH110E
Reference
For changing the image posi-
tion, see p.24 “Adjusting the Po-
sition of Printed Images”.
Inserting originals in the optional
document feeder
A Insert a stack of originals face
up.
To increase the image density,
press the {W} key. See p.25 “Ad-
justing the Image Density of
Prints”.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ To avoid jamming, fan the
originals before placing them
in the document feeder.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To decrease the image density,
press the {V} key. See p.25 “Ad-
justing the Image Density of
Prints”.
D Enter the desired number of
prints with the number keys.
E Press the {Print} key.
When the print job has finished,
press the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-
er} key. Previously entered job set-
tings will be cleared.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What You Can do with this Machine
Below is a quick summary of this ma-
chine's features and where to look in
this manual for more information.
❖ Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset
Ratios
See p.29 “Reducing and Enlarging
Using Preset Ratios”.
❖ Standard Printing
See p.19 “Standard Printing”.
❖ Energy Saver Mode
See p.22 “Energy Saver Mode”
❖ Adjusting the Print Image Position
See p.24 “Adjusting the Position of
Printed Images”.
GRRATI0E
❖ Auto Magnification
See p.31 “Auto Magnification”.
GRPOSI0E
* Paper feed direction
GRAUTO0E
❖ Adjusting the Print Image Density
See p.25 “Adjusting the Image
Density of Prints”.
❖ Zoom
See p.34 “Zoom”.
❖ Tint Mode
See p.26 “Tint Mode”.
GRZOOM0E
GRTINT0E
❖ Changing the Printing Speed
See p.27 “Changing the Printing
Speed”.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Directional Magnification (%)
See p.36 “Directional Magnifica-
tion (%)”.
❖
Economy Mode
See p.50 “Economy Mode”.
❖ Auto Cycle
See p.51 “Auto Cycle”.
a%
❖ All Class Mode
See p.52 “All Class Mode”.
b%
CP2P01EE
❖ Directional Magnification (Size)
See p.38 “Directional Magnifica-
tion (Size)”.
GRCLAS2E
❖ Auto Class Mode
See p.54 “Auto Class Mode”.
1
3
2
4
CP2M01EE
❖ Erasing Center and Edge Margins
See p.40 “Erasing Center and Edge
Margins”.
GRCLAS2E
❖ Manual Class Mode
See p.57 “Manual Class Mode with
❖ Edge Erase
See p.41 “Edge Erase”.
One Original”.
A
B
A
B
GRERAS0E
❖ Printing on Various Kinds of Paper
See p.43 “Printing onto Various
Kinds of Paper”.
GRCLAS2E
❖ Selecting Original Modes
See p.46 “Selecting Original
Modes”.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Manual Class Mode with two or More
Originals
❖
Auto Combine Mode
See p.59 “Manual Class Mode with
two or More Originals”.
1
1 1
C D
A
B
C
GRACOM0E
GRCLAS1E
❖ Skip Feed Printing
See p.71 “Skip Feed Printing”.
❖ Class Mode
See p.62 “Class Mode”.
❖ Programs
See p.73 “Programs”.
❖ Security Mode
See p.76 “Security Mode”.
R R R
R
❖ Quality Start Mode
See p.77 “Quality Start Mode”.
R R R
❖ Job Separation
See p.79 “Job Separation”.
GRCLAS0E
See p.64 “Combine Originals”.
1 2
1 2
GRJOBS0E
❖ Conserving the Master
See p.81 “Conserving the Master”.
GRCOMB2E
❖ On Line Printing
See p.83 “On Line Printing”.
See p.132 “Making Color Prints”.
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Printing in Two Colors
See p.134 “Printing in Two Col-
ors”.
❖
Date Stamp
See p.111 “Date Stamp”.
R
R
P
P
GRCOLO0E
❖ Page Stamp
See p.113 “Page Stamp”.
❖ Image Rotation
See p.85 “Image Rotation”.
❖ Make-up Printing
See p.97 “Make-up Printing”.
1
5
❖ Merging Images
See p.108 “Image Overlay”.
– 1 –
GRPAGE0E
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
❖ Stamp
See p.116 “Stamp”.
Priority
GROVER0E
R
R
Preliminary
Confidential
R
R
R
GRSTAM0E
GROVER1E
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❖ Memory Combine
See p.118 “Memory Combine”.
1
2
3
4
1
3
2
4
GRMCOM0E
GRREPE0E
❖ Original Storage
See p.103 “Original Storage”.
❖ Storage Overlay
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
GROVER0E
R
R
R
GROVER1E
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Machine Exterior......................................................................................... 1
Machine Interior.......................................................................................... 2
Options........................................................................................................ 4
Operation Panel.......................................................................................... 5
Keys ............................................................................................................... 5
Indicators........................................................................................................ 7
Panel Display.............................................................................................. 8
Panel Display Layout ..................................................................................... 9
Print Paper ................................................................................................ 11
Originals.................................................................................................... 13
Printing Preparations............................................................................... 15
Loading Paper.............................................................................................. 15
Setting Up The Paper Delivery Tray ............................................................ 16
Entering a User Code to Use the Machine............................................. 18
Standard Printing ..................................................................................... 19
Removing Prints........................................................................................... 20
Energy Saver Mode.................................................................................. 22
Auto Reset................................................................................................. 23
Adjusting the Position of Printed Images .............................................. 24
Adjusting the Image Density of Prints.................................................... 25
Before Making a Master............................................................................... 25
After Making a Master.................................................................................. 25
Tint Mode................................................................................................... 26
Changing the Printing Speed .................................................................. 27
Stopping a Multi-print Run ...................................................................... 28
Stopping a Multi-print Run to Print Another Original .................................... 28
Changing the Number of Prints Entered and Checking Completed Prints... 28
Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios ....................................... 29
Auto Magnification ................................................................................... 31
Zoom.......................................................................................................... 34
Directional Magnification (%) .................................................................. 36
Directional Magnification (Size) .............................................................. 38
Erasing Center and Edge Margins.......................................................... 40
Edge Erase................................................................................................ 41
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper..................................................... 43
Printing onto Thick Paper............................................................................. 43
Printing onto Standard Paper....................................................................... 43
Printing onto Envelopes ............................................................................... 44
Printing onto Special Kinds of Paper............................................................ 44
Selecting Original Modes......................................................................... 46
Letter/Photo Mode Printing .......................................................................... 46
Photo Mode Printing..................................................................................... 47
Pencil Mode Printing .................................................................................... 48
Economy Mode......................................................................................... 50
Auto Cycle................................................................................................. 51
All Class Mode.......................................................................................... 52
Auto Class Mode ...................................................................................... 54
Manual Class Mode with One Original ................................................... 57
Class Mode................................................................................................ 62
Combine Originals.................................................................................... 64
Auto Combine Mode................................................................................. 69
Skip Feed Printing.................................................................................... 71
Programs................................................................................................... 73
Storing a Program........................................................................................ 73
Protecting a Program ................................................................................... 74
Removing Program Protection..................................................................... 74
Recalling a Program..................................................................................... 75
Security Mode........................................................................................... 76
Quality Start Mode.................................................................................... 77
Using Quality Start Manually........................................................................ 77
Job Separation.......................................................................................... 79
Conserving the Master............................................................................. 81
Double Feed.............................................................................................. 82
When a Double Feed is Detected ................................................................ 82
On Line Printing........................................................................................ 83
Auto On Line ................................................................................................ 84
Image Rotation.......................................................................................... 85
Make-up Printing Features ...................................................................... 86
Main Features .............................................................................................. 86
Make-up Modes for Designated Areas......................................................... 86
Make-up Modes for Outside Designated Areas ........................................... 88
Background Patterns.................................................................................... 89
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a Command Sheet........................................................................... 90
Make-up Samples................................................................................... 100
Original Storage...................................................................................... 103
Storing Originals......................................................................................... 103
Selecting Stored Originals.......................................................................... 105
Protecting Stored Originals ........................................................................ 105
Deleting Stored Originals ........................................................................... 106
Image Overlay......................................................................................... 108
Page Stamp............................................................................................. 113
Originals..................................................................................................... 127
Combine Printing........................................................................................ 129
Making Color Prints.................................................................................... 132
Printing in Two Colors................................................................................ 134
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu..................................................................................... 143
4. Mode Setting.......................................................................................... 146
6. Administrator Mode................................................................................ 153
1-6 Time Setting......................................................................................... 156
3-11 Margin Erase Area............................................................................. 158
5-4 Stamp Position..................................................................................... 162
5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern............................................................................. 165
6-1 Check Counter..................................................................................... 166
6-2 Reset Counters.................................................................................... 167
x Clearing Misfeeds.............................................................................. 175
”x + D + B” Master Misfeeds in the Master Feed Section ........................ 180
”x + B + E” Master Misfeeds in the Master Eject Section......................... 181
”x + E” Master Misfeeds in the Master Eject Section ............................... 182
”x
+ P” Original Misfeeds Occur When Using the Optional Document Feeder ... 183
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faint Prints................................................................................................. 196
Do's and Don'ts ...................................................................................... 197
Environment............................................................................................... 199
Machine Clearance .................................................................................... 200
Cleaning the Main Frame........................................................................... 201
1
2
Exposure Glass Cover (Option)............................................................ 207
Interface Cable Type 85 (Option) .......................................................... 207
Editing Function Type 85 (Option)........................................................ 208
PC Controller (Option) ........................................................................... 208
Key Counter (Option) ............................................................................. 208
Twin Color Press Roller Printing System TC-II (Option)..................... 209
Consumables.......................................................................................... 210
INDEX....................................................................................................... 211
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Front door
6. Paper feed side plates
Flip up to access the keys underneath.
3. Operation panel
See p.5 “Operation Panel”.
8. Paper feed side plates knob
Use to move the side plates.
ter.
Press to lower the paper feed tray.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Machine Interior
3
4
ZBHH180E
14
1. Main switch
Use to turn the power on or off.
5. Paper delivery tray
Completed prints are delivered here.
2. Paper alignment wings
Lift or lower the wings depending on the
type of paper being used.
6. Paper delivery side plates
These plates align the prints on the paper
delivery tray.
3. Paper delivery end plate
7. Paper delivery side plate knobs
This plate aligns the leading edge of
prints.
Use to move the side plates.
8. Handle E1
Use to pull out the master eject unit.
4. Paper delivery end plate knob
Use to move the end plate.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Ink holder
Set the ink cartridge in this holder.
10. Drum unit lock lever B1
Lower to unlock and pull out the drum
unit.
11. Drum unit
The master is wrapped around this unit.
12. Exposure glass
Position originals here face down for
printing.
13. Exposure glass cover or docu-
ment feeder (option)
Lower this cover over an original on the
exposure glass.
14. Trailing edge guides
Swing out these guides when you use A4,
81/2" × 11"KL paper.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options
❖ Document feeder
1. Document Feeder
Note
❒ Other options:
• Color Drum Type 80(L) A3, 11" × 17"
• Color Drum Type 80(S) A4, 81/2" × 11"
• Exposure Glass Cover
• Printer Unit Type 80 RCP80
• Interface Cable Type 85
• Editing Function Type 85
• Key Counter
• PC Controller
• Twin color press roller printing system TC-II
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Panel
Keys
Auto On Line
lay
Original Storage
ZDZS200N
1. {Quality Start} key
9. {Image Density} key
See p.77 “Quality Start Mode”.
Press to make prints darker or lighter. See
p.25 “Adjusting the Image Density of
Prints”.
2. {Security} key
See p.76 “Security Mode”.
10. {Economy Mode} key
Press to save ink. See p.50 “Economy
Mode”.
3. {Skip Feed} key
Press to select skip feed printing. See p.71
“Skip Feed Printing”.
11. {Original Storage} key
Press to select the Original Storage func-
tion. See p.103 “Original Storage”.
4. {User Tools} key
Press to change the default settings to
meet your requirements.
12. {On Line} key
See p.83 “On Line Printing”.
5. {Stamp} key
Press to select the Stamp mode. See p.111
“Date Stamp”, see p.113 “Page Stamp”,
see p.116 “Stamp”.
13. {Auto On Line} key
See p.83 “On Line Printing”.
6. {Make-Up} key
Press to select the Make-up mode. See
14. {Job Separator} key
See p.79 “Job Separation”.
p.97 “Make-up Printing”.
15. {Combine} key
7. {Overlay} key
Press to select the Image Overlay mode.
See p.108 “Image Overlay”.
Press to combine originals onto one print.
See p.64 “Combine Originals”, see p.118
“Memory Combine”, see p.69 “Auto
Combine Mode”.
8. {Edge Erase} key
Press to select Edge Erase mode. See p.41
“Edge Erase”.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. {
Class} key
Press to select All Class, Auto Class,
Manual Class, or Class mode. See p.52
“All Class Mode”, see p.54 “Auto Class
Mode”, see p.57 “Manual Class Mode
with One Original”, see p.59 “Manual
Class Mode with two or More Originals”,
see p.62 “Class Mode”.
17. {W} {V} keys (Speed keys)
Press to adjust the printing speed. See
p.25 “Adjusting the Image Density of
Prints”, see p.27 “Changing the Printing
Speed”.
18. {~}{}}{|}{{} keys
Press to shift the image forward, back-
ward, right, or left. See p.24 “Adjusting
the Position of Printed Images”.
Also use to highlight items you wish to
select on the panel display.
19. {Program} key
Press to enter or recall programs. See p.73
“Programs”.
20. Number keys
Press to enter the desired number of
prints and data for selected modes.
21. {Clear/Stop} key
Press to stop printing.
22. {q} key
Use to enter data in selected modes.
23. {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key
Press to clear any previously entered job
settings.
24. {Start} key
Press to make a master.
25. {Auto Cycle} key
Use to process the master and make
prints in one operation. See p.51 “Auto
Cycle”.
26. {Proof} key
Press to make proof prints.
27. {Print} key
Press to start printing.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicators
1. Special feature indicator
6. Counter
Lights to indicate that special features
have been selected. To access the special
features, lift up the cover on the left side
of the operation panel.
Displays the number of prints entered.
While printing, it shows the number of
prints remaining.
2. Monitor indicators
Your Machine Does Not Operate as You
Want”.
Indicates the status of this machine:
and printing is in the mchine.
Lights when the A3, 11" × 17" drum unit
is installed. See p.136 “Changing the
Drum Size”.
• Blinking: Data is being received, or
Master Making or printing is in
progress.
4. A4, 81/2" × 11" drum indicator
completed.
Lights when the A4, 81/2" × 11" drum unit
Drum Size”.
Indicates the status of this machine:
• On: An error has occurred. Master
Making and printing stops.
• Off: Normal status
5. Color drum indicator
Lights when the color drum unit is in-
stalled. See p.132 “Color Printing Using
the Optional Color Drum”.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The panel display shows the machine status, error messages, and function
menus.
ZBZX170N
1. Items for the selected function
3. Machine status or messages
2. These keys correspond to the se-
lectable items shown above them on
the panel display. To select an item
the key directly below it.
4. Items which can be selected
Important
❒ Strong impact or pressure exceeding 30N will damage the panel display.
Note
Auto
❒ When you select an item on the panel display, it is highlighted (e.g.
).
OK
Items shown grayed-out (e.g.
) cannot be selected.
❒ Common panel display items
[OK]
Confirms a function selection or enters a value.
[Cancel]
Cancels a function selection or entered value and returns to
the previous display.
[Prev.][Next]
When there are too many items to fit on the panel display, use
these keys to move between pages.
{~}{}}{|}{{}[←][→]
Press to highlight items you wish to select on the panel dis-
play.
[Select]
Selects a value.
[Exit]
Returns to the previous display.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panel Display Layout
The basic elements used on the panel display are shown below. Understanding
their meaning helps you use this machine's features quickly and easily.
❖ Sample display when selecting the [Original] key
ZBZX180N
1. Machine status or message
2. Available functions
3. Illustrations of displays in this
manual show the next key to be
pressed whitened
When the [Original] key is pressed, the following display is shown.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Operation
Print Paper
The following limitations apply
Paper Size
Inch
Paper
Weight
Metric
11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14" L,
Paper feed tray A3 L, B4 L, A4 L K, B5 L K,
A5 L, B6 L, A6 L, Others (Ver-
tical: 70 - 297mm, Horizontal: 148
- 432mm)
47.1 -
209.3g/m2,
12.5 - 55.6 lb
81/2" × 11" L K, 51/2" ×
81/2" L K, Others (Verti-
cal: 2.76" - 11.7", Horizon-
tal: 5.83" - 17")
Non-recommended paper:
• Roughly cut paper
• Paper of different thickness in the same stack
• Envelopes heavier than 85g/m2, 22 lb.
• Folded, curled, creased, or damaged paper
• Torn paper
• Slippery paper
• Rough paper
• Paper with any kind of coating (such as carbon)
• Short grain paper
• Thin paper that has low stiffness
• Paper that may create a lot of dust
• Grained paper with the direction of the grain running opposite to the feed di-
rection
• Certain types of long thin envelopes.
E.g. international mail envelopes
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
• The following types of envelopes
1
Note
❒ If you print on rough grained paper, the copy image might be blurred.
❒ You can use A3 (297 × 420mm) or 11" × 17" originals or printing paper. When
you want to print the entire image of an A3, 11" × 17" original, select Reduce
mode because the maximum print areas are as follows:
• Metric version: 290 × 409mm, 11.4" × 16.1"
• Inch version: 290 × 419mm, 11.4" × 16.4"
❒ When you use A3, 11" × 17" and 209.3g/m2, 55.6 lb paper, slow the printing
speed down to setting 1, 2, or 3.
Important
❒ Correct curls in the paper before placing it in the machine. When you cannot
correct the paper curl, stack the paper with the curl face down or face up as
shown in the illustration. If the paper is curled, it might wrap around the
drum or stains might appear.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Originals
Originals
The machine can detect the following original sizes placed on the exposure glass.
Metric version
Inch version
A3L, B4L, A4KL, B5KL
1
11" × 17"L, 81/2" × 14"L, 81/2" × 11"KL
If the machine cannot detect the original sizes properly, select the area to copy
with the {Edge Erase} key. See p.41 “Edge Erase”. The machine may not detect
the original size properly when:
• Originals contain index tabs.
• Originals are OHP transparencies or are translucent.
• Originals are dark.
• Originals contain solid images.
• Originals are of sizes other than those listed above.
If you do not lift the exposure glass cover more than 30cm, 12" when you place
another original, the machine might not detect the next original size correctly.
The maximum original size you can place on the exposure glass is 304.8 ×
432mm, 12" × 17".
If you use originals that have bold letters or solid images at the leading edges,
you might get prints with dirty edges. In this case, place the original face down
with the widest margin toward the paper delivery tray or raise the printing
speed.
Make sure any correction fluid or ink is completely dry before placing originals
on the exposure glass. Not taking this precaution could mark the exposure glass
and cause marks to be printed.
In most situations, place originals as shown below.
R R
R
R
ZDZX030E
When the original is placed in a direction that differs from the print paper, the
machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the print paper
direction.
The first 8mm, 0.32", of the leading edge and the last 2mm, 0.08", of the trailing
edge cannot be printed. Make sure the leading edge margin is at least 8mm,
0.32", and the trailing edge margin is at least 2mm, 0.08".
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Original
Print
a
1
a = 8mm, 0.32"
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Preparations
Printing Preparations
C
Make sure that the paper feed side
plates knob lock lever is raised
(lock is released), and then grasp
the paper feed side plates knob
and adjust the paper feed side
plates to match the paper size.
Loading Paper
1
A Carefully open the paper feed
tray.
ZDCY130E
B Lift the paper feed side plates.
ZDCY01
Important
❒ Always adjust the position with
the lock lever for the paper feed
side plates in the raised position
(lock released).
D Place the paper on the paper feed
ZDCH050E
tray.
Note
❒ When loading larger paper,
slide out the extender.
TPEY040E
Note
❒ Correct the paper curl before
loading the paper. If you cannot
do so, stack the paper with the
curl face down.
Reference
See p.11 “Print Paper”.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
E Make sure that the paper feed
side plates are touching both
sides of the paper, and then push
the lock lever for the side plates
down to lock the side plates into
position.
Setting Up The Paper Delivery
Tray
1
A Raise the paper delivery tray
slightly, and then gently lower it
with your hand.
ZDCY041
ZBHH050E
B Raise each paper delivery side
plate, and then grasp the side
plate knobs and move the paper
delivery side plates to match the
print paper size.
Important
❒ Always make sure that you
push the lock lever for the side
plates down to lock the side
plates into position.
Note
❒ Make sure that the paper size
and direction in the panel dis-
play correspond with the actual
paper size and direction set on
the paper feed tray.
ZDZH180E
Note
❒ The inside of the plates should
correspond to the paper size.
Whenyouuse thick paper(128 g/m2
to 209.3 g/m2, 34 lb to 55.6 lb)
A Adjust the side plates to match
the paper size scale on the
main frame side.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Preparations
When you use standard paper
(47.1 g/m2 to 105 g/m2, 12.5 lb to
28 lb)
When you use 81.4 g/m2, 21.6 lb
or thinner and A4, 81/2 × 11" or
larger paper
A Adjust the side plates to match
the paper size scale on the end
plate side.
A
Lift the paper alignment wings.
1
When you use A4, 8 1/2"
paper
×
11"KL
C Lower or lift the paper alignment
wings by turning the left and
right knobs.
A Swing out the guides as shown
in the illustration.
ZDZY020E
Note
D Turn on the main switch.
❒ When the guides are up, you
might not be able to load the
unit to full capacity (1,000
sheets) depending on the paper
you are using.
❒ Lift the paper alignment wings
if B5L prints are curled.
When you use 81.4 g/m2, 21.6 lb
or thicker paper
TPEH021E
Note
A Lower the paper alignment
❒ You can have the machine dis-
play how much ink and master
are left when you switch it on.
See “User Tools—Ink/Master
Left” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
wings.
When you use 81.4 g/m2, 21.6 lb
or thinner and B5 or smaller
paper
A Lower the paper alignment
wings.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Entering a User Code to Use the Machine
If user codes are turned on, operators
B Press the {q} key.
must enter their user code before they
1
can use the machine. The machine
keeps count of the number of copies
made under each user code.
Note
❒ If you want to use this feature, you
must turn it on and register the
user codes with the user tools. You
can register up to 20 user codes.
See “Set User Code” and “Reg.
User Code” on p.153 “6. Adminis-
C Make your prints.
trator Mode”.
D To prevent others from making
prints with your user code, hold
down the {Clear Modes/Energy Sav-
er} key, and then press the
{Clear/Stop} key.
❒ When user codes are turned on,
the machine will prompt you for
your user code when you turn on
the main switch or after the ma-
chine has been reset.
A Enter your 4–digit user code with
the number keys.
Note
❒ User codes are not displayed on
the panel display.
❒ To change the number entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new number.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Standard Printing
Standard Printing
A Make sure that the machine is E Place the original face down on
ready for printing.
the exposure glass. The original
should be aligned with the refer-
ence mark and the left corner
scale.
1
B If user codes are turned on, enter
your user code with the number
keys, and then press the {q} key.
Reference
See p.18 “Entering a User Code
to Use the Machine”.
C Make sure that there are no previ-
1. Left corner scale
2. Reference mark
ous settings remaining.
Note
❒ To clear any previous settings,
press the {Clear Modes/Energy
Saver} key.
F Lower the exposure glass cover.
G Make your desired settings.
H Press the {Start} key.
D Lift the exposure glass cover.
TPEH010E
A trial print is delivered to the pa-
per delivery tray.
Note
❒ Be sure to lift the exposure glass
cover more than 30cm, 12".
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
I Press the {Proof} key and check K Press the {Print} key.
the image density and the image
position on the proof print.
1
Note
❒ To stop the machine during a
Note
multi-print run, press the
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
{Clear/Stop} key.
❒ To return the machine to the ini-
tial condition after printing,
press the {Clear Modes/Energy
Saver} key.
❒ If the image density is slightly
dark or light, adjust the image
density using the {W}{V} keys.
See p.25 “Adjusting the Image
Density of Prints”.
Removing Prints
A Pull the front paper delivery side
J Enter the number of prints re-
plate down towards you to open.
quired with the number keys.
Note
Note
❒ You cannot open the rear paper
❒ To change the number entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new number.
delivery side plate.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Energy Saver Mode
If you do not operate the machine for a certain period the machine can enter
Idling for pre-printing function to remove ink from inside the ink drum, and
then the machine can enter Energy Saver mode to save energy consumption.
1
You can press the {Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key to cancel Energy Saver mode
and return the machine to the ready condition.
Idling for pre-printing function helps to reduce excess ink when printing. It re-
duces recovery time from Energy Saver mode.
Energy Saver mode uses less electricity.
Note
the machine will enter Idling for pre-printing function, and then it will enter
Energy Saver mode.
❒ You can change the setting so that the machine does not enter Idling for pre-
❒ You can change the time the machine waits before Energy Saver mode starts.
See “Energy Saving” on p.143 “1. System”.
❒ The machine will not automatically enter Energy Saver mode in the following
cases:
• If there is no ink
• If originals or paper are jammed
• If the machine is making master or printing
• If the machine is printing the second page of a combined print job
• If the machine is loading original images in memory
• If there is no paper
• If there is no master
• If the paper delivery box is full
• If originals are left on the document feeder
• If there are originals still on the machine
• If the “cover open” message is displayed
• If the settings have been reset to their defaults
• If there are prints in the sorter's paper delivery tray
• If the User Code entry screen is displayed
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Reset
Auto Reset
If you do not operate the machine for a certain period after printing, the machine
will return to the initial condition. This function is called “Auto Reset”.
1
Note
❒ You can change the time the machine waits before Auto Reset starts. See “Au-
to Reset” on p.143 “1. System”.
❒ The machine will not enter Auto Reset in the following cases:
• If there is no ink
• If originals or paper are jammed
• If the machine is making master or printing
• If the machine is printing the second page of a combined print job
• If the machine is loading original images in memory
• If there is no paper
• If there is no master
• If the paper delivery box is full
• If originals are left on the document feeder
• If the “cover open” message is displayed
• If the settings have been reset to their defaults
• If you select “Off” for “Auto Reset” with the user tools
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Adjusting the Position of Printed Images
Use the following procedure to adjust
B Adjust image position using the
the position of print images as re-
{~}, {}}, {|}, and {{} keys.
quired.
1
GRPOSI0E
Note
* Paper feed direction
ward, leave a 10mm, 0.4" mar-
gin at the leading edge. If there
is no margin, paper might wrap
around the drum and cause a
misfeed.
Limitation
❒ For 308 mm, 12.2"-width paper,
you can only adjust the position of
the print image 5 mm, 0.2" up or
down.
❒ The {~} and {}} keys shift the
image up to 15mm, 0.6" each
way in 0.5mm, 0.02" steps.
Note
❒ When the main switch is turned
off, the position returns to the de-
fault.
❒ The {|} and {{} keys shift the
image up to 10mm, 0.4" each
way in 0.5mm, 0.02" steps.
A Press the [Image =] key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Press the {Proof} key to check the
image position.
Note
❒ You can skip step A and adjust
the image position directly by
pressing the {~}, {}}, {|},
and {{} keys.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Image Density of Prints
Adjusting the Image Density of Prints
There are two ways to adjust the im-
age density of prints:
After Making a Master
1
❖ Before making a master
Use the {Image Density} key.
A To increase the image density,
press the {W} key. To reduce the
image density, press the {V} key.
❖ After making a master
Use the {W}{V} (Speed) keys.
Before Making a Master
A Press the {Image Density} key to
adjust the image density.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Note
❒ The faster the printing speed be-
comes, the lighter the printing
density is. If you want darker
prints, decrease the printing
speed.
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS010N
B Press the {Start} key.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Printing Speed
Changing the Printing Speed
Use the {W} or {V} key to adjust the
printing speed. The relationship be-
tween printing speed and print quali-
ty depends on the type of paper you
use.
1
A Press the {V} key to increase the
speed and press the {W} key to re-
duce the speed.
Note
❒ The following speeds are avail-
able:
• Setting 1:
60 sheets/minute
• Setting 2:
75 sheets/minute
• Setting 3 (default):
90 sheets/minute
• Setting 4:
105 sheets/minute
• Setting 5:
120 sheets/minute
❒ The faster the printing speed be-
comes, the lighter the printing
density is, and vice versa.
❒ When the machine is used in
low temperature conditions, the
image density might decrease.
In this case, slow the printing
speed down to setting 1 or 2.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Stopping a Multi-print Run
Stopping a Multi-print Run to
Print Another Original
Changing the Number of
Prints Entered and Checking
Completed Prints
1
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
A Press the {Clear/Stop} key.
B Set the original.
B Change the number of prints or
C Enter the number of prints and
check the completed prints.
press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ To change the number of prints,
press the {Clear/Stop} key, and
then re-enter the number of
prints with the number keys.
C Press the {Print} key.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios
Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset
Ratios
1
Use this function to have originals re-
duced or enlarged by a preset ratio. A
total of 7 ratios are available (3 en-
largement ratios, 4 reduction ratios).
❒ You can select a ratio regardless of
the size of an original or printing
paper. With some ratios, parts of
the image might not be printed or
margins will appear on prints.
❒ You can change the preset repro-
duction ratios with the user tools.
See “Reproduction Ratio” on p.156
“3-4 Reproduction Ratio”.
❒ Prints can be reduced or enlarged
as follows.
GRRATI0E
❖ Metric version
Ratio (%) Original → Print paper size
Note
141
122
115
93
A4 → A3, A5 → A4, B5 → B4
A4 → B4, A5 → B5
B4 → A3, B5 → A4
—
❒ The leading edge of the print im-
age does not shift when a print im-
age is made with this function.
87
A3 → B4, A4 → B5
B4 → A4, B5 → A5
A3 → A4, A4 → A5, B4 → B5
82
71
❖ Inch version
Ratio (%) Original → Print paper size
155
129
5 1/2" × 8 1/2" → 8 1/2" × 14"
8 1/2" × 11" → 11" × 17", 5
1/2" × 8 1/2" → 8 1/2" × 11"
121
93
77
74
65
8 1/2" × 14" → 11" × 17"
1. Place on the exposure glass
—
2. Place in the optional document
feeder
8 1/2" × 14" → 8 1/2" × 11"
11" × 15" → 8 1/2" × 11"
* Paper feed direction
a = 8mm, 0.32"
11" × 17" → 8 1/2" × 11", 8
1/2" × 11" → 5 1/2" × 8 1/2"
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
A Press the [Ratio] key.
G Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
1
H Make your prints.
B Select the desired ratio with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
E Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
F Press the {Start} key.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Magnification
Auto Magnification
Use this function to have the machine choose an appropriate enlargement or re-
duction ratio based on the size of your original and the paper size you select.
1
GRAUTO0E
Note
❒ The range of ratios which the machine can select depends on where you place
the original:
• On the exposure glass: 50 – 200%
❒ The table below shows the reproduction ratios that can be selected for various
combinations of original and paper size.
❖ Metric version
Original A3L
B4L
A4L
A4K
B5L
B5K
A5L *2 A5K *2
Paper
A3L
B4L
A4L
A4K
B5L
B5K
A5L
B6L
100%
87%
71%
71% *1
61%
61% *1
50%
--
115%
100%
82%
141%
122%
100%
--
--
163%
141%
--
--
200%
173%
--
--
100% *1 115%
115% *1 115%
100%
100% *1 122%
100% *1 100% 122% *1 122%
115% *1 141%
141% *1
82% *1
100% *1 100%
141% *1 141%
122% *1
71%
87%
87% *1
71% *1
50%
87% *1
87%
71%
71% *1
61% *1
82%
71%
82% *1
71% *1
100%
87%
100% *1
87% *1
50%
61%
*1
The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper
direction and selects an appropriate reproduction ratio. See p.85 “Image Rota-
tion”.
*2
Place these originals in the optional document feeder.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
❖ Inch version
Original 11" ×
81/2" ×
14"L
81/2" ×
11"L
81/2" ×
11"K
81/2" ×
17"L
51/2"L *2
K *2
Paper
11" × 17"L 100%
121%
100%
129%
--
--
--
200%
155%
--
--
1
81/2" ×
77%
14"L
81/2" ×
65%
77%
100%
100% *1
65%
100% *1
100%
129%
129% *1
129%
11"L
81/2" ×
11"K
65% *1
50%
77% *1
61%
129% *1
100%
81/2" ×
65% *1
100% *1
51/2" L
*1
The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper
direction and selects an appropriate reproduction ratio. See p.85 “Image Rota-
tion”.
*2
Place these originals in the optional document feeder.
❒ Depending on the original type, a suitable reproduction ratio might not be
able to be selected. See p.13 “Originals” and see p.127 “Originals”.
A Place your original on the exposure glass or in the optional document feed-
er.
B Press the [Ratio] key.
C Select [Auto] with the [→] or {}} key.
D Press the [OK] key.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Magnification
E Press the {Start} key.
1
F Check the image position on the trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] keys. See
p.24 “Adjusting the Position of Printed Images”.
G Make your prints.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Zoom
Use this function to fine-tune the re-
production ratio in increments of 1%.
Note
❒ To select a custom ratio, select
[→] or {~} {}} keys. Then
press the {|} or {{} key and go
to step F.
1
C Press the [OK] key.
D Make sure that [Zoom] is selected.
GRZOOM0E
Note
❒ The range of ratios you can select
depends on where you place the
original:
E Press the [OK] key.
• On the exposure glass: 50–200%
F Select the desired reproduction
ratio in one of the following
ways:
A Press the [Ratio] key.
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
Using the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys
B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}
A Adjust the ratio with the [←]
key.
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Zoom
K Check the image position on the
Using the number keys
trial or proof print.
A Enter the ratio with the num-
Note
ber keys.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
1
L Make your prints.
B Press the {q} key.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
I Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
J Press the {Start} key.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Directional Magnification (%)
Use this function to choose different
D Select [Direct.Mag.(%)] with the [→]
reproduction ratios for the horizontal
and vertical directions. The result is a
squeezing or stretching effect.
or {}} key.
1
a%
b%
E Press the [OK] key.
CP2P01EE
F Enter the vertical and horizontal
ratio.
Note
❒ The range of ratios you can select
depends on where you place the
original:
• On the exposure glass: 50 –
200%
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
A Press the [Ratio] key.
Adjusting ratios with the [←] [→]
or {~} {}} keys
A Adjust the vertical ratio with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
B Press the {{} key.
B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}
C Adjust the horizontal ratio
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
key.
Entering ratios with the number
keys
A Enter the vertical ratio with the
number keys.
B Press the {q} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directional Magnification (%)
C Enter the horizontal ratio with
the number keys.
D Press the {q} key.
G Press the [OK] key.
1
H Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
I Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
J Press the {Start} key.
K Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
L Make your prints.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Directional Magnification (Size)
Use this function to have the machine
A Press the [Ratio] key.
select suitable reproduction ratios
based upon the dimensions of the
print you require and the size of the
original you specify.
1
1
3
2
4
B Select [Mag.] with the [→] or {}}
key.
CP2M01EE
1. Horizontal original size
2. Vertical original size
3. Horizontal print size
4. Vertical print size
Note
C Press the [OK] key.
❒ You can enter sizes within the fol-
lowing ranges.
D Select [Direct.Mag.(Size)] with the
Metric ver-
sion
1 - 999mm (in 1mm steps)
[→] or {}} key.
Inch version 0.1" - 99.9" (in 0.1" steps)
❒ The range of ratios which the ma-
chine can select depends on where
you place the original:
• On the exposure glass: 50-200%
❒ If the calculated ratio is over the
maximum or under the minimum
ratio, it is corrected within the
range of ratios automatically.
E Press the [OK] key.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directional Magnification (Size)
F Enter the vertical original size M Press the {Start} key.
with the number keys and press
the {q} key.
1
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
N Check the image position on the
❒ Up to 999mm, 99.9" can be en-
trial or proof print.
tered.
Note
G Enter the vertical print size with
the number keys, and then press
the {q} key.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
H Enter the horizontal original size
with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
O Make your prints.
I Enter the horizontal print size
with the number keys.
J Press the [OK] key.
tical and horizontal directions.
K Make sure that the original and
the print paper are the correct
size.
L Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Erasing Center and Edge Margins
When printing from thick books, or
A Set the book on the exposure
similar originals, the binding margin
at the center and the edges might ap-
pear on prints. To prevent this, per-
form the following steps.
glass.
1
B Keep the exposure glass cover at
an angle of at least 25 degrees
with the exposure glass.
Important
❒ Be sure to keep the platen cover at
an angle of at least 25 degrees with
the exposure glass.
C Press the {Start} key.
❒ If you do not press hard on the
book while it is scanned, the mar-
gin at the center might no be
erased completely.
Note
❒ If your originals have solid images
at the edges, the machine might
recognize the solid images as shad-
ows and not copy them. In this
case, use Edge Erase mode so that
only the shadows are not copied.
See p.41 “Edge Erase”.
Note
❒ Press hard on the book with
your hand while it is scanned.
D Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
E Make your prints.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Edge Erase
Edge Erase
This function erases all four margins
of the original image.
A Press the {Edge Erase} key.
1
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
❖ Using Edge Erase mode
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
A
B
A
B
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
GRERAS0E
ZDZS150N
❖ When not using Edge Erase mode
When printing from thick books,
or similar originals, the binding
margin at the center and the edges
might appear on prints. The ma-
chine erases these margins auto-
matically. If you do not use Edge
Erase mode using the following
kind of originals, the images to be
printed might be also erased.
original with the [←] [→] or {~}
{}} keys.
A
B
C Press the [OK] key.
D Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
GRERAS1E
Note
❒ You can adjust the size of the mar-
gins with the user tools. The de-
fault is 2mm, 0.1". See p.158 “3-11
Margin Erase Area”.
E Press the {Start} key.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper
Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper
Before printing onto thick paper, thin
paper, envelopes or special kinds of
paper loaded in the paper feed tray,
you must select the paper type.
Printing onto Standard Paper
1
If you wish to print onto standard
(47.1 to 105g/m2, 12.5 to 28 lb) paper,
perform the following steps.
Printing onto Thick Paper
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
If you wish to print onto thick (128 to
209.3g/m2, 34 to 55.6 lb or heavier)
paper, perform the following steps.
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
B Make sure that [Std.] is selected.
B Select [Thick] with the [→] or {}}
key.
C Press the [OK] key.
C Press the [OK] key.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
E If your envelopes do not feed in
well, lift the paper feed tray a lit-
tle, and then lower it so that it
slants up slightly.
Printing onto Envelopes
1
ZDZY030E
B Select [Special] with the [→] or
{}} key.
Printing onto Special Kinds of
Paper
Preparation
To use this function, you have to
register the special paper type in
[
User1] or [User2] with the user tools.
See p.161 “4-19 Type of Paper”
.
C Press the [OK] key.
A Press the [Ppr.Type] key.
D Place the envelopes in the paper
feed tray as shown in the illustra-
tion.
B Select [User1] or [User2] with the
GRENVE0E
* Paper feed direction
Note
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
❒ When you use envelopes, the
paper feed tray capacity is
about 150 sheets (85g/m2, 22 lb)
or enough to load a stack up to
105mm, 4.1" high.
C Press the [OK] key.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
If paper misfeeds occur frequently,
even if you have selected a suitable
paper, follow the steps below.
1
A Press the [Select] key.
B Select the type of paper misfeed
and frequency with the {~}, {}},
{|}, or {{} keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
If paper misfeeds occur frequently in
the paper exit section, even if you are
using standard or thin paper and
have selected [Std.], do the following:
A Set the wing guide to the “Down”
position with the user tools. See
“Deflector Angle” on p.146 “4.
Mode Setting”.
If A4 – B5, 81/2" × 11" thick paper is
not delivered properly to the paper
delivery tray, do the following:
A Set the wing guide to the “Up” po-
sition with the user tools. See “De-
flector Angle” on p.146 “4. Mode
Setting”.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Selecting Original Modes
Select one of the following five modes
to match your originals:
Letter/Photo Mode Printing
1
❖ Letter mode
Select when originals contain only
letters (no pictures).
Preparation
You can adjust the contrast of the
image.
❖ Letter/Photo mode
Select when originals contain pho-
tographs or pictures with letters.
A Press the [Original] key.
❖ Photo mode
Select when originals contain pho-
tographs or pictures with delicate
tones.
❖ Pencil mode
Select when originals are written
in pencil.
B Select [Letter/Photo] with the [→]
or {}} key.
❖ Tint mode
Select when you want to make
halftone printing.
Note
❒ You can adjust the sharpness of
text in Letter mode with the user
tools. See “Adjusting sharpness of
letters” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
C Press the [Contrast] key.
❒ When using Photo mode to print
originals with both text and photo-
graphs, the text will appear lighter.
To avoid this, select Letter/Photo
mode. Alternatively, use the op-
tional Make-up mode to specify
Letter mode for text areas and Pho-
to mode for photograph areas.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Original Modes
D Adjust the contrast with the [←]
Photo Mode Printing
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
A Press the [Original] key.
1
Note
❒ Use "High" to produce clear
B Select [Photo] with the [→] or {}}
prints of people's faces.
key.
❒ Use "Low" to produce clear
prints of landscapes and scen-
ery etc.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
C Press the [OK] key.
Adjusting the photo mode
contrast
H Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
A Press the [Contrast] key.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
I Make your prints.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
B Adjust the contrast with the
G Press the {Start} key.
[←][→] or {~}{}} keys.
1
C Press the [OK] key.
H Check the image position on the
Note
trial or proof print.
❒ Use "High" to produce clear
prints of people's faces.
Note
❒ Use "Low" to produce clear
prints of landscapes and
scenery etc.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
D Select the dot pattern with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
I Make your prints.
Pencil Mode Printing
Note
❒ Originals written in pencil should
be placed on the exposure glass.
A Press the [Original] key.
Note
❒ Four dot patterns are available:
• Setting 1: clearest
• Setting 2: clearer than setting 3
• Setting 3: clearer than setting 4
• Setting 4: clearer than the
standard setting
E Press the [OK] key.
F Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Original Modes
B Select [Pencil] with the [→] or {}}
key.
1
C Press the [OK] key.
D Place your original on the expo-
sure glass.
E Press the {Start} key.
F Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
G Make your prints.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Economy Mode
When you want to save ink, select
Economy mode.
1
Note
❒ Prints will be lighter in this mode.
A Press the {Economy Mode} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS020N
B Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
C Press the {Start} key.
D Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
E Make your prints.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Cycle
Auto Cycle
Use the {Auto Cycle} key to process
masters and make prints in a single
operation.
1
A If the indicator of {Auto Cycle} key
is off, press the {Auto Cycle} key.
B Press the {Start} key.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
All Class Mode
Preparation
Note
You have to store the number of
students in each class with the user
tools. See p.157 “3-5 Class Enter
No.”.
❒
When you choose All Class mode,
Job Separation mode is automati-
cally turned on. The job separator
pulls the top sheet of the each set
delivered to the paper delivery tray
to mark the end of each printed set.
The next cycle begins automatical-
1
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. All the
stored numbers of prints are made for
each set.
ly. See p.79 “Job Separation”
.
❒ You can cancel Job Separation
mode in All Class mode with the
user tools. See “Auto Separate” on
p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
This feature is useful for teachers who
frequently make multiple print sets
for classes e.g. notes, handouts, tests
etc.
Using a standard print mode, the
teacher would have to stand by the
machine entering the number of
prints and pressing the {Print} key for
each class. However, All Class mode
allows you to store the number of stu-
dents in each class into the machine
memory beforehand with the user
tools. Whenever you need to make
print sets for all the classes, place
your original, select [ALL] and press
the {Start} key. Print sets will be
made containing the correct number
of prints for each class.
A Press the {Class} key.
B Make sure that [ALL] is selected.
C Press the [OK] key.
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
GRCLAS2E
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All Class Mode
E Press the {Start} key.
1
F Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
G Make your prints.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Auto Class Mode
Preparation
Note
You have to store the number of
students in each class with the user
tools. See p.157 “3-5 Class Enter
No.”.
❒
When you set Auto Class mode,
Job Separation mode is automati-
cally turned on. The job separator
pulls the top sheet of the each set
delivered to the paper delivery tray
to mark the end of each printed set.
The next cycle begins automatical-
1
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. The
stored numbers of prints are made for
each set.
❒ You can cancel Job Separation
mode in Auto Class mode with the
user tools. See “Auto Separate” on
p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
This feature is useful for teachers who
frequently make multiple print sets
for their classes, e.g. notes, handouts,
tests etc.
Using a standard print function, the
teacher would have to stand by the
machine entering the number of
prints and pressing the {Print} key for
each class. However, Auto Class
mode allows you to store the number
of students in each class into the ma-
chine memory beforehand with the
user tools. Then, whenever you need
to make print sets for several classes,
place your original, select the classes
that need prints and press the {Start}
key. Print sets will be made contain-
ing the correct number of prints for
each class.
A Press the {Class} key.
B Select [By-class] with the [→] or
{}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
GRCLAS2E
D Select the desired classes for each
grade.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Class Mode
Selecting classes with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} key
Selecting classes with the
number keys
A Select the desired class for the
A Enter the desired grade and
1st grade with the {}} key.
class with the number keys.
1
The number of students is dis-
played on the counter.
Note
❒ When you want to select all
the classes, select [ALL].
B Press the [Select] key.
Note
you have finished designat-
ing classes for the 1st grade.
Note
❒ For example, to select grade 2
class 4, enter 24.
❒ To cancel a class selection, se-
lect that class with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} key, and
then press the [Cancel] key.
❒ When you want to select all
the classes for one grade, en-
ter the grade number fol-
lowed by 0.
❒ When you want to select
many classes for one grade,
first select [ALL] and press the
[Select] key, and then dese-
lect the unnecessary classes
with the [Cancel] key.
B Press the {q} key.
C Press the {{} key.
Now you can select classes for
the 2nd grade.
D Select the desired class for the
2nd grade with the {~}, {}},
{|}, or {{} key.
E Press the [Select] key.
Note
❒ To cancel a class, select that
class with the {~}, {}}, {|},
or {{} key, and then press
the [Cancel] key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps C to E until
you have finished designat-
ing all the desired classes.
❒ Repeat steps A and B until
you have finished selecting
all the desired classes.
E Press the [OK] key.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Place one original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
G Press the {Start} key.
1
H Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
I Make your prints.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Class Mode with One Original
Manual Class Mode with One Original
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. Vari-
ous numbers of prints are made for
each set.
B Select [Manual] with the [→] or
{}} key.
1
C Press the [OK] key.
GRCLAS2E
D Enter the desired number of
prints for the first set with the
number keys.
Note
❒
When you set the Manual Class
mode, Job Separation mode is auto-
matically turned on. The job sepa-
rator pulls the top sheet of each set
delivered to the paper delivery tray
to mark the end of each printed set.
The next cycle begins automatical-
E Press the {q} key.
ly. See p.79 “Job Separation”
.
❒ To stop Job Separation mode from
automatically turning on, use the
user tools. See “Auto Separate” on
p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
A Press the {Class} key.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Enter the desired number of L Make your prints.
prints for the second set with the
number keys.
1
G Press the {q} key.
Note
set.
❒ The maximum number of sets
that can be made is 20.
H Press the [OK] key.
I Place one original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
J Press the {Start} key.
K Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Class Mode with two or More Originals
Manual Class Mode with two or More
Originals
1
Preparation
A Press the {Class} key.
To use this function, you have to
select “by each original” with the
“Class Manual Set” setting in the
user tools. See “Class Manual Set”
on p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from different originals. Vari-
ous numbers of prints are made for
each set.
B Select [Manual] with the [→] or
A B
A
{}} key.
B
C
D
GRCLAS1E
Note
❒ When you set Manual Class mode,
Job Separation mode is automati-
cally turned on. The job separator
pulls the top sheet of each set de-
livered to the paper delivery tray
to mark the end of each printed set.
The next cycle begins automatical-
ly. See p.79 “Job Separation”.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Enter the desired number of
prints for the first original with
the number keys.
❒ You can suspend Job Separation
mode whenever you set the Manu-
al Class mode with the user tools.
See “Auto Separate” on p.146 “4.
Mode Setting”.
❒ With the optional document feed-
er, you can place several originals
and make prints of all of them at
once. See p.130 “Manual Class
Mode with Two or More Origi-
nals”.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
E Press the {q} key.
J Press the {Start} key.
1
F Enter the desired number of K Check the image position on the
prints for the second original
with the number keys.
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] keys. See p.24 “Adjusting
the Position of Printed Images”.
L Press the {Auto Cycle} key.
G Press the {q} key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G for each
original.
❒ Up to 20 classes can be set.
M Press the {Print} key.
H Press the [OK] key.
I Place the first original face down
on the exposure glass.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Class Mode
Use the {Class} key to make sets of
prints from the same original. The
same numbers of prints are made for
each set.
B Select [Same-NO.] with the [→] or
{}} key.
1
R R R
R
R R R
GRCLAS0E
D With the number keys, enter the
desired number of prints for each
set.
Note
❒ When you choose Class mode, Job
Separation mode is automatically
turned on. The job separator pulls
the top sheet of each set delivered
to the paper delivery tray to mark
the end of each printed set. The
next cycle begins automatically.
See p.79 “Job Separation”.
E Press the {q} key.
❒ You can suspend Job Separation
mode whenever you set the Class
mode with the user tools. See “Au-
to Separate” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
A Press the {Class} key.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Class Mode
F With the number keys, enter the
number of sets you wish to make.
1
Note
❒ Up to 99 sets can be selected for
an original.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Place one original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
I Press the {Start} key.
J Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
K Make your prints.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Combine Originals
You can combine originals in two ways:
1
1 2
1 2
GRCOMB2E
❖ 2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 2 images
Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with the two
images placed side-by-side.
❖ 2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 4 images
Combine two single-sided originals onto one single-sided print with each im-
age duplicated (total of four images).
Note
❒ You can also use Memory Combine mode. See p.118 “Memory Combine”.
❒ You can set the machine to cancel Combine Originals mode after finishing
❒ Any image closer than 8mm, 0.32" to the leading edge of the first original will
not be printed. Any image closer than 4mm, 0.16" to the leading edge of the
second original will also not be printed. When the image is too close to the
leading edge, use copies of the originals with the image shifted at least 8mm,
0.32" for the first original (4mm, 0.16" for the second original) from the leading
edge.
❒ You can select different image settings for the first and second original.
❒ Make sure that the paper feed side plates touch the paper lightly and that the
paper size and direction shown on the panel display match the size and direc-
tion of paper actually placed in the paper feed tray. Either case can cause the
two original images not to appear in the proper position on prints.
❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used with the Combine
feature (2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 2 images).
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combine Originals
❖ Metric version
Original Size
A4K
100%
87%
B5K
115%
100%
82%
A5K
141%
122%
100%
87%
B6K
163%
141%
115%
100%
82%
A6K
200%
173%
141%
122%
100%
Paper Size A3L
1
B4L
A4L
B5L
A5L
71%
61%
71%
50%
58%
71%
❖ Inch version
Original Size
81/2" × 11"K
100%
51/2" × 81/2"K
Paper Size
11" × 17"L
129%
100%
100%
65%
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"L
51/2" × 81/2"L
77%
65%
50%
❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used with the Combine
feature (2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print with 4 images).
❖ Metric version
Original Size
A3L
B4L
A4L
71%
61%
50%
-
B5L
82%
71%
58%
50%
-
A5L
100%
87%
71%
61%
50%
B6L
115%
100%
82%
A6L
141%
122%
100%
87%
Paper
Size
A3L
B4L
A4L
B5L
A5L
50%
58%
-
-
-
-
50%
-
-
-
71%
-
58%
71%
❖ Inch version
Original Size
11" × 17"L
81/2" ×
81/2" ×
51/2" ×
14"L
11"L
65%
50%
50%
-
81/2"L
100%
77%
Paper Size
11" × 17"L
50%
65%
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"L
51/2" × 81/2"L
-
-
-
50%
-
-
77%
50%
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
❒ If a suitable reproduction ratio is not selected, images might not completely
appear on prints.
❒ Originals reading from left to right.
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
3
4
ZDZX160E
Reference
When you use the optional document feeder with this function, see p.129
“Combine Printing”.
A Place the first original face down.
ZDCH110E
Note
❒ When you place an original sideways (K), the top should be toward the
operation panel as shown above.
B Enter the number of prints using the number keys.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combine Originals
C Check the print paper size and the reproduction ratio.
Note
❒ To have the machine choose a suitable ratio automatically, use Auto Mag-
nification mode. See p.31 “Auto Magnification”.
1
D Press the {Combine} key.
E Select [Combine 2] or [Quadruple] with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
F Press the [OK] key.
G Press the {Start} key.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
H The beeper sounds after the first original has been stored. Place the second
original face down.
1
ZDCH110E
I Press the {Start} key.
J Check the image position on the trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not correct, adjust it using the [Image =] key. See
p.24 “Adjusting the Position of Printed Images”.
K Make your prints.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Combine Mode
Preparation
B Enter the number of prints using
the number keys.
To use this function, you have to
select Auto Combine mode with
the user tools. See “Combine” on
p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
1
You can have images duplicated in
two ways:
1
1 1
C Check the print paper size and the
reproduction ratio.
Note
GRACOM0E
❒ To have the machine choose a
suitable ratio automatically, use
Auto Magnification mode. See
p.31 “Auto Magnification”.
❖ 1 single-sided original → 1 single-sid-
ed print of 2 images
The original image is duplicated
twice on one print.
D Press the {Combine} key.
❖ 1 single-sided originals → 1 single-
sided print of 4 images
The original image is duplicated
four times on one print.
Reference
See p.64 “Combine Originals” for
details.
A Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
E Select [Repeat 2] or [Repeat 4] with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Press the [OK] key.
G Press the {Start} key.
1
H Check the image position on the
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
I Make your prints.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Skip Feed Printing
Skip Feed Printing
prints using the {Skip Feed} key. By
default, when one sheet of paper is
fed, the drum rotates twice. However,
you can select the number of drum ro-
tations. This gives you a chance to re-
move prints one by one from the
paper delivery tray or insert one sheet
of paper between two prints. If you
use this function, you can also use pa-
per longer than the length limitation
of 432mm, 17.0".
C If necessary select the number of
drum rotations per sheet of paper
fed with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
1
Note
Note
❒ For every sheet of paper fed, the
drum rotates twice by default. You
can change this default setting
with the user tools. See “No. of
Skip Feed” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
❒ You can also select the number
keys.
❒ You can select from 2 to 9 rota-
tions.
❒ The maximum length of paper in
❒ By default, the machine asks
you to confirm the number of
rotations. You can have this step
omitted by adjusting the user
tool settings. See “No. of Skip
Feed” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
Skip Feed mode is 460mm, 18.1".
❒ When you use paper longer than
432mm, 17.0", prints will not be de-
livered to the paper delivery tray
properly, so lower the paper deliv-
ery end plate and take out the
prints by hand.
D Press the [OK] key.
A Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
E Press the {Start} key.
B Press the {Skip Feed} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS030N
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
1
G Make your prints.
Note
❒ After printing is completed, the
Skip Feed setting returns to the
default.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programs
Programs
You can store up to 9 frequently used
print job settings in machine memory
and recall them for future use.
D Press the [OK] key.
1
Note
❒ The program numbers (1 to 9)
will be displayed in the panel
display.
Note
❒ Stored programs are not cleared
when you turn off the main switch.
❒ If a user program has been pro-
tected, that program number
will not appear in the panel dis-
play. To change a protected user
program, see p.74 “Protecting a
Program”.
❒ Stored programs cannot be delet-
ed. If you want to change a stored
program, overwrite it.
Storing a Program
❒ If all the user programs have
been protected, you cannot
store any settings. Press the
[Cancel] key.
to put into memory.
B Press the {Program} key.
E Select the program number you
want to store the settings in with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
C Select [Store] with the [→] or {}}
Note
key.
❒ You can also select the program
number with the number keys.
F Press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ If this program number is al-
ready used, the machine asks
whether you wish to overwrite
it or not. Press the [Yes] or [No]
key.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Note
Protecting a Program
❒ Already protected program num-
bers are shown with a black back-
ground (e.g. A).
writing over your program, do the
following:
1
❒ You can also select the program
number with the number keys.
A Press the {Program} key.
E Press the [Select] key.
F Press the [OK] key.
Removing Program Protection
A Press the {Program} key.
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
{}} key.
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
{}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select the program number you
want to protect with the [←] [→]
or {~} {}} keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programs
D Select the program number you C Press the [OK] key.
want to remove protection from
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
Note
❒ Programs that have been stored
beforehand are represented by a
number.
1
D Select the program number you
want to recall with the [←] [→] or
{~} {}} keys.
Note
❒ Already protected program num-
bers are shown with a black back-
ground (e.g. A).
❒ You can also select the program
number with the number keys.
Note
E Press the [Select] key.
❒ You can also select the program
number with the number keys.
F Press the [OK] key.
E Press the [OK] key.
Recalling a Program
F Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
A Press the {Program} key.
G Press the {Start} key.
B Make sure that [Recall] is selected.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Security Mode
This function prevents others from mak-
ing prints of confidential documents
from the master. For example, if you
want to print some documents with sen-
sitive information, use this function after
making your prints so that nobody can
access that master again.
1
A Make your prints.
B Press the {Security} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS040N
C Press the [Yes] key.
Note
❒ If you set Security Mode, you
cannot make prints after finish-
ing one job even if you press the
{Proof} key or {Print} key. Press
the [Exit] key.
❒ You cannot cancel Security
mode even if you turn off the
main switch.
❒ Security mode is canceled when
you make a new master.
❒ You cannot pull out the drum
unit when in security mode.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quality Start Mode
Quality Start Mode
If the machine is not used for a long
period of time or you change the color
drum unit, the ink on the drum might
dry causing print quality to deterio-
rate. To solve this problem, you can
have the machine carry out a few idle
spins of the drum before a print run.
This will restore image quality and
save you having to make a repeat
print run.
Note
❒ You can change the number of
spins in Manual Quality Start
mode with the user tools. See
“Idling for Q.start” on p.146 “4.
Mode Setting”.
1
❒ You can change the number of
spins after the fixed time period
has passed in Auto Quality Start
mode with the user tools. See “No.
of Q.start” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
You can use this feature in two ways:
❖ Manual Quality Start
Choose Quality Start mode for the
next print run manually using the
{Quality Start} key.
❒ Use this mode in combination with
Energy Saver mode to produce
even better results.
❖ Auto Quality Start
Using Quality Start Manually
Have the machine check automati-
cally how long ago it was used be-
fore each print run. If the machine
has not been used for a long time,
Quality Start will be used for the
print job. By default, Auto Quality
Start mode is on. You can turn it off
with the user tools. See “Setting
Q.start” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
You can set whether Auto Quality
Start mode is used for Before print
and After print by selecting “Yes”
or “No” in Auto Quality Start
mode with the user tools. See p.146
“4. Mode Setting”.
A Press the {Quality Start} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS050N
B Place your original on the expo-
sure glass or in the optional docu-
ment feeder.
If Before print is selected for Auto
Quality Start mode, the machine
carries out a few idle spins before a
print run.
If After print is selected for Auto
Quality Start mode, the machine
carries out ink removal before en-
tering Energy Saver mode to pre-
vent ink bleeding for the print.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Job Separation
Job Separation
The print on the top of each print set in the paper delivery tray is pulled by the
1
GRJOBS0E
R CAUTION:
• While printing, do not touch the belt at the end of the paper delivery tray or
the job separator. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
Limitation
❒ In Job Separation mode, the following limitations apply.
❖ Metric version
Minimum paper size
Maximum paper weight
Paper delivery tray capacity
127.9g/m2
600 sheets (64g/m2)
Length: 210mm
Width: 128mm
❖ Inch version
Minimum paper size
Maximum paper weight
Paper delivery tray capacity
Length: 8.3"
Width: 5.1"
34 lb
600 sheets (17 lb)
Note
❒ When you use thin paper, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.
The job separator might tear the paper.
❒ If the job separator touches the print image, prints might be marked. In this
case, it is not recommended to use Job Separation mode.
❒ When you do not use Job Separation mode, you can select the machine con-
dition after each print set is fed out to the paper delivery tray with the user
tools. See “Auto Class” on p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
❒ If there are less than 10 sheets of paper in the paper delivery tray, the machine
may not be able to use Job Separation mode.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
A Press the {Job Separator} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
1
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS060N
B Make your prints.
Note
❒ After the last page of each print set is fed out to the paper delivery tray, the
job separator pulls the last sheet of each group in Job Separation mode. The
next job separation begins.
ZDZH110E
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conserving the Master
Conserving the Master
The machine automatically changes
the master length depending on the
paper size you use. This saves both
master and ink.
1
a = Images on the master
b = Masters
c = Conserved area
Limitation
❒ The optional document feeder is
required.
Note
❒ This function is turned on when
you use A4K, 81/2" × 11" K or
B5K paper and you set 2 or more
originals in the optional document
feeder.
❒ This function does not apply to the
last page.
❒ You can cancel Master Saving
mode with the user tools. See
Setting”. You can also save master
using the optional A4, 81/2" × 11"
drum. See p.136 “Changing the
Drum Size”.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Double Feed
When two or more sheets of paper
feed at once, the machine stops and a
warning message appears on the pan-
el display.
When a Double Feed is Detected
1
When a double feed is detected, the
machine stops and a warning mes-
sage appears on the panel display.
Preparation
To use the double feed function,
select “On” for the “Double Feed
Warng” with the user tools. See
p.146 “4. Mode Setting” No.28.
A Check the output and press [Exit]
key.
Note
❒ When the misfeeds message is
displayed, remove the misfed
paper. See p.175 “x Clearing
Misfeeds”.
Note
❒ Double Feed function may not de-
tect the paper properly when:
• There is a mixture of different
❒ When paper is wrapped around
the drum, open the front door
and remove it. See p.177 “When
paper is wrapped around the
drum”.
colored paper.
• There is a mixture of paper of
differing thickness.
❒ Double feed is possible with paper
size from A6 to Double letter.
B Remove the misfed paper.
Note
❒ If a double feed is wrongly de-
tected while printing on the re-
verse side of paper or the face of
printed paper, select “Off” for
“Double Feed Warng” with the
user tools. See p.146 “4. Mode
Setting” No.28.
❒ How to prevent double feed.
See p.197 “Do's and Don'ts”.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On Line Printing
On Line Printing
On Line printing allows you to use
this machine as a PC printer.
A Press the [fin PRNT] key.
1
Limitation
❒ The optional PC controller is re-
quired.
Note
❒ Before printing onto A5K, 51/2" ×
81/2" K, or non-standard size pa-
per, you need to select the paper
size with the [Pnt.Size] key.
When printing onto A5K, 51/2" ×
81/2" K, or non-standard paper
sizes
❒ When printing onto thick paper,
thin paper or special kinds of pa-
per from the paper feed tray, select
the paper type before pressing the
{On Line} key. See p.43 “Printing
onto Various Kinds of Paper”.
A Press the [Pnt.Size] key.
A Press the {On Line} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
B Select A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K, or
Custom (non-standard) with
the [←] or [→] key.
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS070N
When a print job has not finished
If a print job has not finished print-
machine cannot receive data from
the PC. To print the next job from
the PC, cancel the interrupted
print job.
C Press the [OK] key.
When printing onto standard
paper sizes or sizes other than
A5K, 51/2" × 81/2"K
A Refer to the PC controller man-
ual.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Auto On Line
You can select whether the machine
automatically switches to On Line
mode when it receives data from a
PC.
1
Preparation
• The default setting for On Line
mode is On. However, you can
change the setting to Off if re-
quired.
• You can press the {Auto On Line}
key to switch Auto On Line on
or off. If the Auto On Line indi-
cator is lit, Auto On Line is ac-
tive. If the indicator is off, Auto
On Line is inactive.
• When the Auto On Line indica-
tor is lit, Auto On Line has pri-
ority when data is received
from a PC. If you want to pre-
vent the machine from inter-
rupting a print job when it
receives data from a PC, press
the {Auto On Line} key so the
Auto On Line indicator goes off
and Auto On Line becomes in-
active.
A Press the {Auto On Line} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS160N
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Rotation
Image Rotation
When your original setting direction is different from the paper direction, the
machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the paper di-
rection.
1
Note
❒ The following tables list the combinations that can be used in Image Rotation
mode.
❖ Metric version
Original A3L
B4L
A4L
A4K
B5L
B5K
A5L✩ A5K✩
Paper
A4L
A4K
B5L
B5K
A5L
B6L
--
#
--
#
--
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
#
--
#
--
#
#
#
#
#
#
#: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-
per direction.
✩: Place these originals in the optional document feeder.
❖ Inch version
Original 11" ×
81/2" ×
14"L
81/2" ×
11"L
81/2" ×
11"K
51/2" ×
51/2" ×
17"L
81/2"L✩
81/2" K✩
Paper
81/2" × 11"L --
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
--
#
--
#
--
81/2" × 11"K
#
51/2" ×
--
#
#
81/2"L
#: The machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the pa-
per direction.
✩: Place these originals in the optional document feeder.
Note
❒ If you use Zoom mode, non-standard size originals or paper, the image will
not be rotated.
❒ It takes longer than usual to make masters in Image Rotation mode.
❒ You can cancel Image Rotation mode with the user tools. See “Auto Rotation”
on p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Make-up Printing Features
Make-up mode enables you to do more than just make an exact copy of the orig-
inal. A variety of editing and image processing functions allow you to quickly
and easily customize your prints.
1
Main Features
Command sheets allow you to create special effects without cutting and past-
ing—up to 4 commands can be given for an original. By combining Make-up
modes and printing with different color drums, you can create a variety of print-
ing effects.
Make-up Modes for Designated Areas
Mode
Sample
Designated Area
Command sheet/Original
(Closed area method)
Print
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Letter mode
WORLD
WORLD
World computer and
peripheral devices
are equipped with
World computer and
peripheral devices
are equipped with
Photo mode
Delete Area mode
Outline mode
Hello!
Hello!
How are you?
How are you?
P./N. mode (Positive Neg-
ative mode)
BALLET
BALLET
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing Features
Mode
Sample
Designated Area
Command sheet/Original
(Closed area method)
Print
6.
7.
8.
Solid mode (Image Pattern
mode)
BALLET
1
All Page Pattern mode
(Area Pattern mode)
LUNCH
MENU
LUNCH
MENU
All + Outline (Image Out-
line and Area Pattern
mode)
CAT
CAT
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Make-up Modes for Outside Designated Areas
Mode
Sample
Undesignated Area
Command sheet/Original
Print
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Letter mode: The area out-
side designated areas is
printed in Letter mode.
HAWAII
HAWAII
Please enjoy your
Summer vacation.
Please enjoy your
Summer vacation.
Photo mode: The area out-
side designated areas is
printed in Photo mode.
WORLD
World computer and
peripheral devices
are equipped with
Save Area mode: The area
outside the designated ar-
eas is deleted.
Outline mode: The area
outside the designated
area is printed in Outline
mode.
HAWAII
HAWAII
Note
❒ In Make-up mode, commands must be given for both designated areas and
areas outside the designated areas.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing Features
Background Patterns
A total of 164 background patterns is available in Make-up mode:
• 40 basic patterns
1
• 40 patterns similar to the basic patterns but with patterns elements at 4 times
the size.
• 80 variants based on 90° rotations of all the basic and enlarged patterns.
• 4 registered user patterns.
* Paper Feed Direction
Note
❒ The basic patterns are numbered 1 to 40.
❒ You can make your own make-up background patterns with the user tools.
See p.165 “5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern”.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
Command sheets are fed first so that the machine can recognize the areas of the
original which are to be edited as designated areas.
1
Command Sheets
The command sheet is a sheet of paper designating the areas to be edited. Com-
mand sheets must be made on white or translucent paper, and should be the
same size as the original.
Do not designate areas within 5 mm, 0.2" from the top.
Note
❒ Poor quality paper (such as newsprint, recycled paper, etc.) should not be
used for command sheets because any dark spots or streaks will be read as
designated areas.
❒ Do not use blotting paper or other absorbent paper for command sheets be-
cause ink might leak through the paper and get the exposure glass dirty.
Making a Command Sheet
There are two ways of designating areas: the diagonal line method and the
closed area method.
-Features
• You can combine up to 4 command sheets when making a master.
• You cannot use both the closed and diagonal line method on the same com-
mand sheet.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
• There is no limit to the number of areas you can designate on a single com-
mand sheet.
1
• If designated areas on two or more command sheets overlap, the last com-
mand sheet will apply to the overlapping portion.
• If you use Outline mode for letter images with a thickness of less than 3mm,
0.12", the print image might come out as expected.
-Notes
The image might differ depending on how the designated area is drawn, so re-
member the following when making the command sheet.
Designated area
Area recognized
Preferred designated area
Part of the designated area is
surrounded by 3 sides of the en-
tire area.
Make a space of at least 2mm,
0.08", in front of the area surround-
ed by 3 sides (relative to the feed
direction).
1
2
1, 2 = 2mm, 0.08"
Double line pattern.
Only the outer line is Make a gap of at least 2mm, 0.08"
recognized. in width.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Designated area
Area recognized
Preferred designated area
The designated area is sur-
rounded by 3 sides of another
designated area.
Make a space of at least 2mm, 0.08"
in front of the area surrounded by
3 sides (relative to the feeding di-
rection).
1
2
1
1, 2 = 2mm, 0.08"
Non-closed line
Designate the area with a closed
line.
Diagonal line method
Note
❒ A diagonal line must be drawn through the area that you wish to edit.
A Put the command sheet on top of the original.
ZM-20
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
B Draw a line using a felt tip pen (black, red or blue) with a thickness of at
least 1mm.
1
ZM-21
Note
❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.
❒ The diagonal line can be drawn from left to right or vice versa.
❒ Draw the line at least 2mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the whole
image can be recognized.
a
b
c
d
GRCOMM1E
a, b, c, d = 2mm, 0.08"
❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2mm, 0.08",
from any neighboring image.
a
b
c
GRCOMM2E
a, b, c = 2mm, 0.08"
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Closed area method
Note
❒ The line designating the area must be a closed loop.
1
A Put the command sheet on top of the original.
ZM-20
B Using a black, red, or blue felt tip pen, draw a line around the area to des-
ignate. The line should have a thickness of at least 1mm.
ZM-26
Note
❒ Make sure there is no break in the line.
❒ Draw the line at least 2mm, 0.08", away from the image so that the whole
image can be recognized.
a = Line marking the designated area
b = 2mm, 0.08"
c = Image within the designated area
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Command Sheets for Make-Up Printing
❒ The line marking the designated area should be more than 2mm, 0.08",
from any neighboring image.
1
a
b
d
c
GRCOMM4E
a = 2mm, 0.08"
b = Neighboring image
c = Line marking the designated area
d = Image within the designated area
Command Sheets and Finished Prints
The following illustrations will help you understand how to draw a command
sheet.
❖ Drawing a command sheet using a diagonal line
The diagonal line method is easy to use for designating rectangular areas. It is
also more precise, but it is difficult to use for designating complex areas.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing
Make-up Printing
A Press the {Make-Up} key.
E Select the mode for the first com-
mand sheet with the [←] [→] or
{~} {}} {|} {{} keys.
1
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS080N
B Make sure that [1] is selected.
F Press the [OK] key.
Then press the [OK] key.
G If necessary, select the pattern for
the first command sheet with the
{~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key. Then
press the [OK] key.
C Select the frame shape with the
H If necessary, select the size and
direction of the pattern you se-
lected in step G with the [←] [→]
or {~} {}} keys.
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
D Press the [OK] key.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
I Press the [OK] key.
L Press the [OK] key.
Note
Note
❒ Follow steps B – I for the other
❒ When you select Photo mode
for both inside and outside ar-
eas, you cannot select different
dot patterns and contrast.
command sheets.
1
❒ You can select a pattern regis-
tered with the user tools for
only one command sheet.
❒ When you want to confirm your
settings, press the {Make-Up}
key twice. Then press the [OK]
key repeatedly until the panel
display reaches the setting you
want to confirm.
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key and
enter the new value.
J After you have finished designat-
ing modes for all the command
sheets, select [Outside Area] with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
M If you have selected Photo mode,
select the dot pattern and the con-
trast with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
K Select the mode for the outside
area with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Note
❒ Four dot patterns settings are
available:
• Setting 1: clearest
• Setting 2: clearer than setting 3
• Setting 3: clearer than setting 4
• Setting 4: clearer than the
standard setting
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Printing
N Press the [OK] key.
O Place the first command sheet
face down on the exposure glass
and press the {Start} key.
1
The beeper sounds after the com-
mand sheet is scanned.
Note
❒ Repeat step O for the other com-
mand sheets.
P Place the original face down on
the exposure glass or face up into
the document feeder and press
the {Start} key.
Note
❒ If a command sheet or original
misfeeds from the document
feeder, remove the misfed sheet
or original and reset it in the
document feeder.
❒ It is not necessary to reset the
previous command sheets or
original.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Make-up Samples
1
-Sample 1
A Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape , Designated area: Delete Area mode
B Outside area: Letter mode
C Print
1
2
3
ZM-50
1. Original
2. Command sheet No.1
3. Print
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make-up Samples
-Sample 2
A Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape/, Designated area: All + Outline No. 30
B Command Sheet No. 2 Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern No.
17
1
C Outside area: Fn1
D Print
2
1
4
3
ZM-51
1. Original
3. Command sheet No.2
2. Command sheet No.1
4. Print
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
-Sample 3
A Print the original as it is
B Change the drum unit for color printing
1
C Command Sheet No. 1, Frame shape , Designated area: All page pattern
No. 39
D Outside area: Letter mode
E Print
2
1
3
ZM-52
1. Original
2. Command sheet No.1
3. Print
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original Storage
Original Storage
You can store frequently used origi-
nals in machine memory and then
easily recall them later to make prints
whenever they are needed.
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
1
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Preparation
• You can store up to 8 Original
Storage settings in machine
memory.
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
• The number of Original Storage
settings you can store depends
on the type of originals.
ZDZS170N
B Select [Store] with the [→] or {}}
• You may not be able to store
Original Storage settings for
some types of original.
key.
• The machine remembers Origi-
nal Storage settings even after
the power to the machine has
been switched off or the {Clear
Modes/Energy Saver} key has
been pressed to clear.
C Press the [OK] key.
Storing Originals
D Select the desired number to store
with the [←][→] or {~}{}} keys.
Store the print images of the originals
you want to use frequently.
Note
❒ You can use this feature with:
• Reproduction Ratio
• Selecting Original Modes
• Adjusting the Image Density of
Prints
• Edge Erase
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
E Place the original on the exposure
glass as shown, then press the
{Start} key.
Non-standard size originals
A If you place non-standard size
original, this display will be
shown.
1
Press the [OK] key.
ZDCH110E
Note
❒ If print images for an original
have already been stored in ma-
chine memory, check the stored
images and choose whether to
overwrite them or not. To over-
write the images, press the [Yes]
key. To keep the images, press
the [No] key.
B Enter the vertical length with
the number key, and then
press the {#} key.
C Enter the horizontal width
with the number key, and then
press the {#} key.
TPES580E
D Place your originals on the ex-
posure glass, and then press
the {Start} key.
❒ If you select overwrite, the doc-
ument stored in memory will be
erased unless it is write protect-
ed.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original Storage
Selecting Stored Originals
Protecting Stored Originals
To select the images of originals that
have been stored in machine memo-
ry, do the following:
If you want to protect the images of
originals stored in machine memory,
do the following:
1
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
Protecting Originals
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
Economy Mode
Original Storage
ZDZS170N
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
B Select [Select] with the [←][→] or
ZDZS170N
{~}{}} keys.
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
{}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select the number of the stored
original with the [←][→] or
{~}{}} keys.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select the number of the original
to be protected with the [←][→] or
{~}{}} keys.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Press the {Start} key.
E Press the [Select] key.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Press the [OK] key.
Deleting Stored Originals
Removing Original Protection
If you want to delete the images of
originals stored in machine memory,
do the following:
1
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
Important
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
❒ You cannot restore the images
once they have been deleted.
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
A Press the {Original Storage} key.
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
ZDZS170N
Economy Mode
Original Storage
B Select [Protect] with the [→] or
{}} key.
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS170N
B Select [Delete] with the [→] or {}}
key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Press the [Cancel] key.
C Select the number of the original
to be deleted with the [←][→] or
{~}{}} keys.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Image Overlay
The machine can merge two different
originals onto the same print paper.
❖ Storage overlay
1
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
Two types of merging are available:
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
❖ Overlay
B
B
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE
A
A
Combines the images of originals
stored in Original Storage with the
originals placed on the machine.
GROVER0E
Two different originals are merged
onto the same print paper.
Storage Overlay
❖ Format
A Press the {Overlay} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
R
R
R
Economy Mode
Original Storage
GROVER1E
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
The image of the original which is
copied first will become the back-
ground image for all copies. The
following originals will be copied
with this background.
ZDZS090N
B Select [Storage overlay] with the
[←][→] or {~}{}} keys.
❖ On Line overlay
When your machine is equipped
with the optional PC controller, an
image sent from a PC and the orig-
inal image can be merged onto the
same print paper.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Overlay
C Press the [OK] key.
C Place you originals and print start
with your PC.
Note
Limitation
❒ If the one of the stored originals
already chosen, the display in
step C does not show. Skip to
step D.
❒ The optional PC controller is re-
quired to use On Line Overlay
mode.
1
❒ In order to get a correct print
image, the size of the original
and the PC image should be
identical.
D Press the [OK] key.
E Place your originals, and then
press the {Start} key.
Overlay Format
On Line Overlay
A Press the {Overlay} key.
A Press the {On Line} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS090N
ZDZS070N
B Select one of Image Overlay
modes with the [←] [→] or {~}
{}} keys.
B Press the {Overlay} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Make-Up
Auto On Line
Darker 2
Over lay
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS090N
C Press the [OK] key.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
D Place your originals, and then
Placing originals in the optional
document feeder
press the {Start} key.
A Place originals in the docu-
Placing originals on the exposure
glass
ment feeder.
1
A Place the first original on the
exposure glass.
ZDCH120E
Note
ZDCH110E
❒ To avoid originals misfeed-
ing, fan the originals before
placing them in the docu-
ment feeder.
B Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ When you select [Format] in
step B, the original for the
template should be placed
first.
B Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ When you select [Format] in
step B, the original for the
template should be on the
top.
❒ To change the background
image in Format mode, press
the {q} key. Then place the
next original for the template
and press the {Start} key.
❒ To change the background
image in Format mode, press
the {q} key. Then set the
next original for the template
and press the {Start} key.
C Place the next original on the
exposure glass.
D Press the {Start} key.
Note
❒ When you select [Format] in
step B, repeat steps C and D.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Date Stamp
Date Stamp
Use this function to have the date
stamped on prints.
DateStamp Print image
direction
on the dis-
1
play
Preparation
Before you use this function, you
have to set the machine's internal
clock with the user tools. See p.156
“1-6 Time Setting”.
Limitation
❒ The font size of the date cannot be
changed.
❒ If you select Page Stamp and Date
Stamp together, the last stamp di-
rection selected takes priority.
Note
❒ The default format of Date Stamp
is “Month Day Year”. You can
change this setting with the user
tools. See “Date Style Set” on p.151
“5. Stamp”.
A Press the {Stamp} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
❒ You can edit the Date Stamp posi-
tion. See p.163 “5-7 Position
(Date)”.
Normal
Darker 1
Make-Up
Auto On Line
Darker 2
❒ The Date Stamp directions on the
panel display and actual print im-
ages are as follows.
Over lay
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS100N
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
B Make sure that [Date] is selected.
G Place your original, and then
press the {Start} key.
Placing your original (K) on the
exposure glass
1
C Press the [OK] key.
A Place your original as shown in
the illustration.
D Select the desired position and di-
rection with the [←] [→] or {~}
{}} keys.
ZDCH110E
Placing your originals (K) in the
optional document feeder
E Press the [OK] key.
F Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
A Place your originals as shown
in the illustration.
TPES580E
Note
❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish
to set the other Stamp functions.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ To avoid originals misfeed-
ing, fan the originals before
placing them in the docu-
ment feeder.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Stamp
Page Stamp
Use this function to have page num-
bers stamped on prints.
❒ You can edit the preset page num-
bering position with the user tools.
See p.164 “5-10 Position (Page)”.
1
❒ [P1, P2,…, P5] is the default format.
You can change this default setting
with the user tools. See
“Type(Page)” on p.151 “5. Stamp”.
1
5
A Press the {Stamp} key.
–1 –
Image Density
Stamp
GRPAGE0E
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Three numbering formats are avail-
able:
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
• P1, P2,....., P5
• 1/5, 2/5,....., 5/5
• -1-, -2-,....., -3-
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS100N
Limitation
❒ The size and font of Page Stamp
cannot be changed.
B Select [Page] with the [→] or {}}
key.
❒ If you select Page Stamp and Date
Stamp together, the last stamp di-
rection selected takes priority.
Note
relationship between the Page
Stamp direction on the panel dis-
play and the actual print image.
C Press the [OK] key.
Page
Print image
Stamp di-
rection on
the dis-
play
D Select the desired format with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
P.1
P.1
1/5
P.1
1/5
–1–
GRPPOS6E
–1–
–1–
GRPPOS4E
GRPPOS7E
GRPPOS5E
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
B Press the [OK] key.
E Press the [OK] key.
C Enter the first page number
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
If you selected [P1,P2] or [-1-,-2-]
1
A Enter the first page number
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Note
❒ You can also enter the page
number with the number
keys.
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
❒ You can also enter the page
number with the number
keys.
D Press the [OK] key.
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
F Select the desired orientation
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
B Press the [OK] key.
If you selected [1/5,2/5]
A Enter the last page number
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
Note
❒ You can also enter the page
number with the number
keys.
TPES580E
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key
and enter the new value.
Note
❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish
to set the other Stamp modes.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Stamp
I Place your original, and then
press the {Start} key.
Placing your originals (K) on the
exposure glass
A Place the first original as
shown in the illustration.
ZDCH110E
Note
❒ Repeat step I for the other
originals.
Placing your originals (K) in the
optional document feeder
A Place your originals as shown
in the illustration.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ The first original should be
on the top.
❒ To avoid originals misfeed-
ing, fan the originals before
placing them in the docu-
ment feeder.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Stamp
B Select [Stamp] with the [←] [→] or
{~} {}} keys.
1
Priority
R
R
Preliminary
Confidential
GRSTAM0E
One of the following 3 messages can
be stamped on prints.
C Press the [OK] key.
CONFIDENTIAL
PRIORITY
D Select the desired message with
the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
PRELIMINARY
Limitation
❒ Only one message can be stamped
at a time.
Note
❒ You can change some Stamp set-
tings (size, density, or position)
with the user tools. See “Size”,
“Stamp Density”, “Stamp Posi-
tion” on p.151 “5. Stamp”.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Select the page to be stamped
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
❒ The message “CONFIDENTIAL”
is selected as a default. You can
change this setting with the user
tools. See “Type” on p.151 “5.
Stamp”.
A Press the {Stamp} key.
Image Density
Stamp
Lighter
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
G Press the [OK] key.
Make-Up
Over lay
Auto On Line
Economy Mode
Original Storage
Edge Erase
Skip Feed
Job Separator
ZDZS100N
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stamp
H Select the stamp position with the
Placing your originals (K) in the
optional document feeder
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
A Place your originals as shown
in the illustration.
1
I Press the [OK] key.
J Select the [Yes] or [No] key.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ To avoid originals misfeed-
ing, fan the originals before
placing them in the docu-
ment feeder.
TPES580E
Note
❒ Press the [Yes] key if you wish
to set the other Stamp modes.
K Place your original and press the
{Start} key.
Placing your original (K) on the
exposure glass (contact glass)
A Set your original as shown in
the illustration.
ZDCH110E
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Memory Combine
You can combine originals in four ways:
1
❖ 4 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 4 images
4 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 4 original images on one
side.
❖ 8 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 8 images
8 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 8 original images on one
side.
❖ 16 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 16 images
16 one-sided pages are printed onto 1 one-sided sheet, 16 original images on
one side.
❖ Repeating an image over the entire print
1 original image is printed repeatedly.
Note
❒ A separation line between images can be printed with the user tools. See
“Comb. Sep. Line” on p.146 “4. Mode Setting”.
Combining onto a Single–sided Print
❖ 4 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 4 images
1
2
3
4
1
3
2
4
GRMCOM0E
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
❖ 8 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 8 images
1
2
1
5
2
3
7
4
8
1
6
7
8
1
2
1
2
3
5
7
4
6
8
7
8
GRMCOM1E
❖ 16 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided print of 16 images
1
2
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
10 11 12
15
16
13 14 15 16
GRMCOM2E
Limitation
❒ To use “16 one-sided originals → 1 one-sided print of 16 images” mode, the
optional document feeder is required.
❒ If the calculated ratio is under the minimum ratio, it is corrected within the
range of the ratio automatically. However, with some ratios, parts of the im-
age might not be copied.
❒ The machine cannot copy originals different in size and direction.
Note
❒ The number of originals printed (combined) can be 4, 8, or 16.
❒ In this mode, the machine selects the reproduction ratio automatically. This
reproduction ratio depends on the print paper size and the number of origi-
nals.
❒ When the original is placed at a different direction from the print paper, the
machine automatically rotates the original image by 90° to match the print pa-
per direction.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
❒ You can set the machine to cancel Memory Combine mode after finishing
your print job with the user tools. See “Cancel Comb.” on p.146 “4. Mode Set-
ting”.
❒ Refer to the following table when you select the original and paper sizes.
1
❖ Placing originals in the optional document feeder (metric version)
Original A3L
B4L
A4KL
B5KL
A5KL
Paper
A3L
*3
*3
*3
*2
*3
*3
*2
*2
*3
*3
*1
*2
*2
*3
B4L
--
--
--
A4KL
B5KL
--
--
--
*1
*2
*3
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
❖ Placing originals in the optional document feeder (inch version)
Original 11" × 17"L
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"KL
81/2" × 51/2"KL
Paper
*3
*3
*3
*2
*3
*3
*1
*2
*2
*3
11" × 17"L
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"KL
51/2" × 81/2" L
--
--
--
--
--
--
*1
*2
*3
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8, 16 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.
❖ Placing originals on the exposure glass (metric version)
Original A3L
B4L
A4KL
B5KL
Paper
A3L
*2
*2
*2
*1
*2
*2
*1
*1
*2
*2
B4L
--
--
--
A4KL
B5KL
--
--
--
*1
*2
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
❖ Placing originals on the exposure glass (inch version)
Original 11" × 17"L
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"KL
Paper
*2
*2
*2
*1
*2
*2
11" × 17"L
1
81/2" × 14"L
81/2" × 11"KL
51/2" × 81/2" L
--
--
--
--
--
--
*1
*2
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4, 8 Originals mode.
You can use these original and paper sizes in Combine 4 Originals mode.
A Press the {Combine} key.
B Select [Memory Combine] with the [→] or {}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select your desired mode.
E Press the [OK] key.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
F Place your originals.
Placing your original (K) on the exposure glass
1
ZDCH110E
Placing your originals (K) in the optional document feeder
A Place your originals as shown in the illustration.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ The first original should be on the top.
❒ To avoid originals misfeeding, fan the originals before placing them in
the document feeder.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
G Press the {Start} key.
Note
lected mode, prints can be made as shown in the illustration. In this case,
press the {q} key after all the originals have been scanned.
1
1
2
3
1
3
2
GRMCOM3E
❒ When placing an original on the exposure glass or one sheet at a time in the
optional document feeder, repeat steps F and G. After placing the last orig-
inal, press the {q} key, and then the {Start} key.
Repeat
GRREPE0E
Limitation
❒ Part of the repeated image might not be printed depending on the paper size,
direction and reproduction ratio.
Note
❒ The number of repeated images depends on the original and paper size, and
reproduction ratio.
❒ Check the following table for the relationship between the direction of the
original and paper, and the number of repeated images.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
❖ Example: copying A4 L originals onto A3L paper.
The number of repeated im- Reproduction ratio
ages
Print image
4
71%
1
GRREPE3E
❖ Example: copying A5L originals placed in the optional document feeder onto
A3L paper.
Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio
16 50%
Print image
GRREPE4E
❖ Example: copying 81/2" × 11" K originals onto 11" × 17" L paper.
Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio
100%
Print image
2
GRREPE5E
❖ Example: copying A5L originals placed in the optional document feeder onto
A4K paper.
Number of repeated images Reproduction ratio
50%
Print image
8
GRREPE6E
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Combine
A Press the {Combine} key.
1
B Select [Memory Combine] with the [→] or {}} key.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Select [Repeat] with the [→] or {}} key.
E Press the [OK] key.
F Select the reproduction ratio.
Reference
See p.29 “Reducing and Enlarging Using Preset Ratios”.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
G Set your original.
Placing your original (K) on the exposure glass
1
A Place your original as shown in the illustration.
ZDCH110E
Placing your originals (K) in the optional document feeder
A Place your originals as shown in the illustration.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ To avoid originals misfeeding, fan the originals before placing them in
the document feeder.
H Press the {Start} key.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Optional Functions
Optional Document Feeder
Insert a stack of originals in the docu-
ment feeder. It will be fed automati-
cally.
The following original sizes placed in
the document feeder can be detected.
Metric version
A3 L, B4 L, A4 KL,
B5 KL, A5KL
11" × 17" L, 81/2" × 14"
L, 81/2" × 11"KL, 51/2"
× 81/2"KL
Inch version
Originals
Placing the following originals in the
document feeder might cause mis-
feeds or damage to the originals.
Note
Place the following kinds of originals
on the exposure glass:
❒ Place originals after correction flu-
id and ink have completely dried.
Not taking this precaution could
mark the exposure glass and cause
marks to be printed.
• Originals heavier than 128g/m2, 34
lb
• Originals lighter than 52g/m2, 14
For standard printing functions, set
originals as shown below.
lb
• Originals smaller than 148mm ×
210mm, 5.9" × 8.3"
• Originals larger than 297mm ×
R
864mm, 11.6" × 34.0"
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased origi-
R
nals
GRSETT1E
• Originals with any kind of coating,
such as thermal fax paper, art pa-
per, aluminum foil, carbon paper,
or conductive paper
If the original is placed in a different
direction from the print paper, the
machine automatically rotates the
original image by 90° to match the
print paper direction.
• Bound originals such as books
• Damaged originals
You cannot place originals of differ-
ent sizes at the same time.
• Originals with glue on them
• Pasted originals
When you use thin originals, place
one original at a time in the document
feeder or place them on the exposure
glass.
• Originals written in pencil
• Thin originals that are a little stiff
• Originals with index tabs
• Transparent originals such as OHP
transparencies or translucent pa-
per
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
The first 8mm, 0.32", of the leading
edge and the last 2mm, 0.08" of the
trailing edge cannot be printed. Make
sure the leading edge margin is at
least 8mm, 0.32", and the trailing edge
margin is at least 2mm, 0.08".
C Adjust print settings as necessary,
and then press the {Start} key.
Do not stack originals above the limit
mark.
2
Placing Originals
A Adjust the guide to the original
D Make your prints.
size.
B Insert the aligned originals face
up into the document feeder.
Note
❒ If the next original has been
placed in the document feeder
before the machine stops, that
original is fed automatically
and a trial print is delivered to
the paper delivery tray after the
print of the first original is com-
pleted. Check the image posi-
tion on the trial print of the next
original. If necessary, make
proof prints using the {Proof}
key to check the image position
again.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ To avoid originals misfeeding,
fan the originals before placing
them in the document feeder.
Limitation
❒ Approximately 50 originals
(80g/m2, 21 lb) can be inserted
at one time in the document
feeder. The first (top) original
will be fed first.
Note
❒ To avoid jamming, fan the orig-
inals before placing them in the
document feeder.
❒ The guides must fit snugly
against both sides of the stack.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Document Feeder
D Press the {Combine} key.
Combine Printing
Reference
See p.64 “Combine Originals” for
details.
A Insert the two originals face up.
2
E Select [Combine 2] or [Quadruple]
with the [←][→] or {~} {}} keys.
ZDCH120E
Note
❒ The first original will be printed
on the left side of the paper.
❒ To avoid originals misfeeding,
fan the originals before placing
them in the document feeder.
F Press the [OK] key.
G Press the {Start} key.
B Enter the number of prints with
the number keys.
H Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
C Check the print paper size and the
Note
reproduction ratio.
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
Note
❒ To have the machine choose a
suitable ratio automatically, use
Auto Magnification mode. See
p.31 “Auto Magnification”.
❒ After the first original has been
stored, the second original is
fed.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
❒ If you place only one original,
the beeper sounds after the first
original has been scanned in.
Place the second original and
any print settings you require.
Then press the {Start} key.
E Press the {q} key.
Manual Class Mode with Two
or More Originals
2
Reference
See p.59 “Manual Class Mode with
two or More Originals”.
F Enter the desired number of
prints for the second original
with the number keys.
A Press the {Class} key.
G Press the {q} key.
B Select [Manual] with the [→] or
Note
{}} key.
❒ Repeat steps F and G for each
original.
❒ Up to 20 classes can be set.
H Press the [OK] key.
I Place your originals face up in the
document feeder.
C Press the [OK] key.
D Enter the desired number of
prints for the first original with
the number keys.
ZDCH120E
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Document Feeder
Note
M Press the {Print} key.
❒ To avoid originals misfeeding,
fan the originals before placing
them in the document feeder.
❒ The originals are fed from the
top of the stack. Make sure that
the originals are placed in the
correct sequence with the first
on the top.
2
J Press the {Start} key.
K Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
L Press the {Auto Cycle} key.
Note
❒ In Auto Cycle mode, printing
starts automatically after a trial
print is delivered.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
Color Printing Using the Optional Color
Drum
Color drum units are available as op-
tions in addition to the standard black
unit. For making color prints, a sepa-
rate drum unit is necessary for each
color.
Changing the Color Drum Unit
2
B Lower the drum unit lock lever
Note
(B1).
❒ If the ink on the color drum dries,
use the Quality Start mode. See
p.77 “Quality Start Mode”.
Making Color Prints
A Make sure that the color drum in-
dicator is lit.
Note
❒ Make sure the green light be-
side the drum unit lock lever is
on before sliding out the drum.
If the light is off, close the front
door, wait for five seconds, and
then open.
B Press the {Start} key.
C Check the image position on the
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
D Make your prints.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color Printing Using the Optional Color Drum
C Pull the drum unit handle out F Insert the color drum unit along
slowly (B2).
the guide rail.
2
TPEH290E
G Lower the drum unit lock lever
D Lift the upper drum stay (B3) a lit-
tle to unlock the drum unit, and
then pull out the drum unit while
holding the drum unit handle
(B2) and the upper drum stay (B3).
(B1) of the inserted drum.
H Slide in the drum unit until it
locks in position.
Important
❒ Be careful not to let the drum
unit fall.
E Make sure the optional color
drum lock is securely set.
TPEH091E
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
I Lift drum unit lock lever (B1).
A Prepare the two originals. Place
the first original on the exposure
glass.
2
TPEH081E
J Close the front door.
ZDCH110E
Note
B Enter the number of prints with
❒ Make sure that the Open Cov-
er/Unit indicator turns off, and
the Color Drum indicator turns
on.
the number keys.
Printing in Two Colors
After printing in one color, you can
print in another color on the same
side of the print.
C Press the {Start} key.
R
R
P
P
GRCOLO0E
Note
❒ Let the ink on the prints dry for a
while before printing on them
again.
D Check the image position on the
❒ If the prints are not dry, the paper
feed roller might become dirty. In
this case, wipe the roller with a
cloth.
trial or proof print.
Note
❒ If the image position is not cor-
rect, adjust it using the [Image
=] key. See p.24 “Adjusting the
Position of Printed Images”.
❒ You cannot print in two colors at
one time.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Color Printing Using the Optional Color Drum
E Press the {Print} key.
2
F Remove the prints from the paper
delivery tray and place them on
the paper feed tray again as
shown in the illustration.
ZDZY010E
G Change the drum unit. See p.132
“Changing the Color Drum Unit”.
TPEH101E
H Place the second original and
press the {Start} key.
I Check the image position.
J Press the {Print} key.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Optional Functions
Changing the Drum Size
To save costs on master rolls and ink,
you can shorten the length of each
master by changing to an optional
smaller drum.
2
Printing Area (At 23°C/73°F,
65% RH)
❖ Metric version
A3 drum
More than 290 × 410mm,
11.4" × 16.2"
A4 drum
More than 290 × 200mm
❖ Inch version
11" × 17"
drum
More than 290 × 420mm,
11.4" × 16.6"
81/2" × 11"
drum
More than 11.4" × 7.8"
Master Cut Length
A3 drum…320mm × 530mm, 12.5" ×
20.9", 255 masters/roll
11" × 17" drum…320 × 540mm, 12.5" ×
21.3", 245 masters/roll
Optional A4, 81 /2 "
×
11"
drum…320mm × 325mm, 12.5" ×
12.8", 410 masters/roll
Note
❒ For changing the drum unit, see
p.132 “Changing the Color Drum
Unit”.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Combination Chart
Combination Chart
This combination chart shows which modes can be used together.
✩
X
means that these modes can be used together.
means that these modes cannot be used together.
*1
means that these modes cannot be used together (the function chosen sec-
ond takes priority)
*2
means that these modes cannot be used together (the function chosen first
takes priority)
Function chosen second
-- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 ✩ *1
Letter, Pho-
to, Let-
ter/Photo,
Pencil, Tint
mode
✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Economy
mode
✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Auto Cycle
✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
Preset Re-
duce/En-
large
✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
Zoom
✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1 ✩ *1
Auto Magni-
fication Se-
lection
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combination Chart
Function chosen second
3
✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
Directional
Magnifica-
tion (%)
Directional
Magnifica-
tion (size)
Combine
Originals (2
Images on
one sheet)
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2 *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1 *2 *2 ✩ *1
Combine
Originals (4
Images on
one sheet)
Memory
Combine
mode (4
Originals)
mode (8
Originals)
Memory
Combine
mode (16
Originals)
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ *1
Edge Erase
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1
All Class
mode
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1
Manual
Class mode
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combination Chart
Function chosen second
3
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1
Class mode
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩ ✩ *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Job Separa-
tion
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- *1 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 -- -- *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 -- ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *1
Overlay
Form
Storage
Overlay
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 ✩ -- ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 ✩ ✩ -- ✩ *2 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ -- *2 ✩ *2 ✩ *1
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 -- *2 *2 ✩ *1
*2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *1 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 -- -- ✩ *1
*2 ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 -- ✩ ✩ *2
Date Stamp
Page Stamp
Stamp
Repeat
Make-up
Original
Storage
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ -- ✩
*2 ✩ ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 ✩ --
✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ X ✩ X X X X ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ X X X X X X X X X ✩ X
Skip Feed
On Line
Image Rota-
tion
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Combination Chart
3
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. User Tools
Accessing the User Tools
The user tools allow you to customize
various default settings. This section
is intended for the machine adminis-
trator.
Note
❒ [Next]: Press to go to the next
page.
❒ [Prev.]: Press to go back to the
A Press the {User Tools} key.
previous page.
B Press the [OK] key.
C Search for the desired user tool
number of each function with
the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
D Press the [OK] key.
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
Using the number keys
ZDZS110N
A Enter the desired user tool
number (1 to 7) with the num-
ber keys.
B Select the desired user tools
menu. See p.143 “User Tools
Menu”.
Using the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}
key
A Search for the desired user tool
number (1 to 7) with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} key.
B Press the [OK] or {q} key.
C Enter the desired user tool
number of each function with
the number keys.
D Press the [OK] or {q} key.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
C Change the settings by following
the instructions on the panel dis-
play, and then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ To change the value entered,
press the {Clear/Stop} key before
pressing the [OK] key. Then en-
ter the new value.
❒ [Cancel]: Press to return to the
previous menu without chang-
ing any data.
D Press the {User Tools} key to re-
turn to the standby display.
4
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
Note
❒ The settings are not canceled
even if the main switch is
turned off or the {Clear
Modes/Energy Saver} key is
pressed.
❒ You can also return to the stand-
by display by pressing the [Can-
cel] key.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
User Tools Menu
Reference
For accessing the user tools, see p.141 “Accessing the User Tools”.
1. System
No.
Mode
Description
1
Auto Reset
The machine returns to its initial condition automatically after
your job is finished. The automatic reset time can be set from 1 to
5 minutes or off (0 minutes).
Note
❒ Default: Off
4
2
R. Cntr. Display
Use to display the total number of masters and prints.
Note
ing the {Start} key will not be counted.
3
4
Reset R. Counter Choose whether the total number of masters and prints is reset.
Note
❒ Default: Not clear
mm/inch
Choose the units of measurement shown on the panel display.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Metric version: mm
Inch version: inch
5
6
Language on LCD The language used for panel display messages can be selected.
Note
❒ Default: English
Time Setting
Use to set the machine's internal clock.
Note
❒ The clock must be adjusted if you change the clock to daylight
saving time/summer time, or return to standard time.
Reference
For setting the clock, see p.156 “1-6 Time Setting”.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
No.
Mode
Description
7
Data Print
Use to print out the following data.
Note
❒ Available settings:
•
•
•
Log Data (Number of prints made, how many times paper
misfeeds occur and so on.)
Reset Counters (Number of prints and master made under
each user code.)
Store Class (Registered number of students in each class.)
8
Energy Saving
You can set the time until the Energy Saver mode starts.
Note
❒ Default: 3 Min. (minutes)
4
2. Set Operat'n Mode
No.
Mode
Description
1
Min. Quantity
The minimum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.
Example: If you specify 20 as the minimum number of prints, runs
of 20 or more prints will be accepted, print runs of less than 20
prints will not be accepted.
Note
❒ Default: 0
2
3
Max. Quantity
The maximum print quantity can be set between 0 and 9999.
Note
❒ Default: 9999
CopyCount Dis- The counter can be set to show the number of prints made (Up),
play
or the number of prints left to be made (Down).
Note
❒ Default: Down
5
Panel Beeper
Turns the beeper on or off.
Note
❒ Default: STD. (standard)
❒ Available settings:
•
•
ALL OFF (The beeper does not sound when you press keys
or when warning messages appear on the panel display.)
STD. (When you press a key, the beeper does not sound.
When warning messages appear on the panel display, the
beeper sounds.)
•
ALL ON (The beeper sounds when you press a key or
when warning messages appear on the panel display.)
6
LCD Contrast
You can adjust the brightness of the panel display.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
3. Initial Setting
No.
Mode
Description
1
Paper Type
Specifies the paper type at power on.
Note
❒ Default: Std. (Standard)
2
3
4
MSTR Makg.
Density
Specifies the image density at power on.
Note
❒ Default: Std. (Standard)
Original Priority Specifies the original mode at power on.
Note
❒ Default: Letter
4
Reproduct'n Ra- Adjust a fixed reproduction ratio between 50 and 200%.
tio
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Metric version: 71%, 82%, 87%, 93%, 100%, 115%, 122%,
141%
Inch version: 65%, 74%, 77%, 93%, 100%, 121%, 129%,
155%
Reference
For setting the ratios, see p.156 “3-4 Reproduction Ratio” 3–4
Reproduction ratio.
5
Class Enter No.
Before using All Class or Auto Class mode, register the number
of students in each class with this function.
Note
❒ You can store student numbers for up to 9 grades with 12
classes in each, giving a maximum of 108 classes. Each class
can have up to 9999 students.
Reference
For registering the number of students, see p.157 “3-5 Class
Enter No.” 3–5 Class NO.
6
7
LT/Photo Con-
trast
Specifies the contrast level for Letter/Photo when the power is
switched on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
LT/Photo Priori- Specifies the screen image in Letter/Photo mode when you press
ty
the [Original] key.
Note
❒ Default: Letter
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
No.
Mode
Description
8
Photo Contrast
Specifies the contrast level for Photo when the power is switched
on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
9
Photo(Screen)
Specifies the screen image in Photo mode when you press the
[Original] key.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
10
Eco.Mode
ON/OFF
Specifies whether Economy Mode is set to “On” or “Off” when
the power is switched on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: Off
4
11
12
Margin Eras.Area Adjusts the erase edges margin.
Note
❒ Default: 2 mm, 0.1"
Ratio Priority
You can set the primary ratio on the display when you press the
[Ratio] key.
4. Mode Setting
No.
Mode
Description
1
Auto Cycle
ON/OFF
Specifies whether Auto Cycle mode is selected at power on.
Note
❒ Default: ON
2
3
Class Manual Set Use one original or multiple originals in Manual Class mode.
Note
❒ Default: Std. (One original)
Ignore Paper Size If you are making prints on non-standard paper and the original
image does not entirely appear on the print, set paper size detec-
tion to “Ignore”. The machine will not detect the paper length.
Note
❒ Default: Not to ignore
4
No Orig. Size DF When you set long originals in the optional document feeder, set
original detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not detect the
original size.
Note
❒ Default: Not to ignore
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
No.
Mode
Description
5
No Orig. Size
When you place originals of non standard sizes on the exposure
glass, set original detection to “Ignore”. The machine will not de-
tect the original size.
Note
❒ Default: Not to ignore
6
Background
ON/OFF
When you make prints in Photo, Letter/Photo, or Tint mode, the
background of the prints might become dirty. Turn Background
“On” to improve the clarity of your prints.
Note
❒ Default: W/O back. correction (off)
7
8
Longer Paper
Combine
Use paper longer than 432mm, 17.0".
4
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
If you select “Automatic (Auto Combine mode)”, you can make
two or four identical images on one sheet by pressing the {Com-
bine} key and {Start} key.
Note
Reference
For using Auto Combine mode, see p.69 “Auto Combine
Mode”.
9
Comb. Sep. Line You can select a separation line in Memory Combine mode.
Note
❒ Default: None
❒ Available settings:
a
b
c
d
e
GRLINE0E
•
•
•
•
•
a = None
b = Solid
c = Broken1
d = Broken2
e = CropMarks
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
No.
Mode
Description
10
Cancel Comb.
Specifies whether Combine Originals or Memory Combine mode
is cleared after finishing your print job.
Note
❒ Default: Not to cancel
11
No. of Skip Feed Specifies the number of drum rotations in Skip Feed mode at
power on. You can also select whether you can change the num-
ber of drum rotations temporarily when you press the {Skip Feed}
key. See p.71 “Skip Feed Printing”.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Panel display: Display
Number of Skip Feed: 2
4
Reference
For changing the number of rotations, see p.159 “4-11 No. of
Skip Feed”.
12
13
Idling for Q.start When you use the Manual Quality Start mode, you can select
how many times the drum unit idles.
Note
❒ Default: 7
Setting Q.start
If the machine is not used for a long period of time, the ink on the
drum might dry causing image quality to deteriorate. The Auto
Quality Start mode automatically recovers image density quality
after a selected time has passed. If Auto Quality Start mode is set
to “Not to use”, you can regain print quality by making a few ex-
tra prints or you can use the Manual Quality Start mode.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
Before print: Yes
After print: Yes
14
No. of Q.start
You can select how many times the drum unit idles after the dis-
played time periods have passed in Auto Quality Start mode.
Note
❒ Default: See p.160 “4-14 No. of Q.start”.
❒ To increase the print image density, increase the number of
drum rotations, and vice versa.
Reference
For changing the number of idle spins, see p.160 “4-14 No. of
Q.start”.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
No.
Mode
Description
15
Deflector Angle
You can change the angle of the wing guide depending on the pa-
per type you use.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
❒ Available settings:
•
•
Up (Select this setting when standard thickness or thin pa-
per misfeeds at the paper exit section occur frequently.)
Down (Select this setting when A4 – B5, 81/2" × 11" thick
paper is not delivered properly to the paper delivery tray.)
16
Auto Class
When you do not use the Separation mode, you can select the ma-
chine's condition after each printing set is fed out to the paper de-
livery tray.
4
Note
❒ Default: Stop
❒ Available settings:
•
•
Start printing automatically (After the last page of each
printing set is fed out to the paper delivery tray, the ma-
chine stops for a few seconds. Then, the next cycle begins.)
Stop (After the last page of each printing set is fed out to
the paper delivery tray, the machine stops. If you press the
{Print} key, the next cycle begins.)
17
18
Auto Separate
Specifies whether Job Separation mode is automatically carried
out when you make prints in All Class, Auto Class, Manual Class,
or Class mode.
Note
❒ Default: ON
Ink/Master Left
Specifies whether you can check the amount of ink and master.
Note
❒ Default: OFF
❒ Available settings:
•
•
OFF (You cannot check the remaining amount of ink or
master.)
ON (When the remaining amount of ink or master is less
than half, the panel display indicates these amounts when
you turn on the main switch.)
•
Check remaining volume (You can see the remaining
amounts of ink and master regardless of these amounts.)
19
Type of Paper
When one kind of paper misfeed occur frequently, you can regis-
ter its paper type in “User1” or “User2”.
Reference
For registering a special paper type, see p.161 “4-19 Type of
Paper”.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
No.
Mode
Description
20
Auto Rotation
When the direction in which your original is placed differs from
that of the paper, the machine automatically rotates the original
image by 90° to match the paper direction. You can cancel this
setting.
Note
❒ Default: ON
21
Master length
The machine determines the master length according to the num-
ber of originals placed in the optional document feeder and the
paper sizes. If you wish to use A3/11" × 17" master regardless of
the number of originals set and the paper sizes, select “A3”.
Note
4
27
28
Cancel Stor.O.lay Specifies whether settings for Storage Overlay are retained, or
not, when a storage overlay job has finished.
Note
❒ Default: Not to cancel
Double Feed
Warng
Specifies whether a warning is displayed or not when a double
feed is detected.
Note
❒ Default: OFF
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
5. Stamp
No.
Mode
Description
1
Type
You can select the stamp message at power on with the Stamp
mode.
Note
❒ Default: CONFIDENTIAL
2
Size
You can edit the preset stamp sizes.
Note
❒ Default: Standard
❒ Adjustment values:
•
Double size
4
3
4
Stamp Density
Stamp Position
You can select the style of the stamps.
Note
❒ Default: Solid-fill
You can edit the preset stamp position.
Note
❒ Default: See p.162 “5-4 Stamp Position”.
❒ Available settings: See p.162 “5-4 Stamp Position”.
Reference
For adjusting the stamp position, see p.162 “5-4 Stamp Posi-
tion”.
5
6
Date Style Set
You can select the format of the date stamp.
Note
❒ Default: Month Day Year
Date Position Set You can select the date stamp direction at power on in Date Stamp
mode.
Note
❒ Default: Upper Left
7
Position(Date)
You can edit the date stamp position.
Note
❒ Default: See p.163 “5-7 Position (Date)”.
❒ Available settings: See p.163 “5-7 Position (Date)”.
Reference
For adjusting the date stamp position, see p.163 “5-7 Position
(Date)”.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
No.
Mode
Description
8
Type(Page)
You can select the page numbering style at power on in Page
Stamp mode.
Note
❒ Default: P1,P2
9
Direction(Page)
You can select the page numbering direction at power on in Page
Stamp mode.
Note
❒ Default:
•
•
When you select “P1,P2” or “1/5,2/5” with the
“Type(Page)” user tool: Upper Right
When you select “-1-,-2-” with the “Type(Page)” user tool:
Down Center
4
10
Position(Page)
You can edit the page numbering position.
Note
❒ Default: See p.164 “5-10 Position (Page)”.
❒ Available settings: See p.164 “5-10 Position (Page)”.
Reference
For adjusting the page numbering position, see p.164 “5-10 Po-
sition (Page)”.
11
Make/Chg. Pat- Make your own background pattern in Make-up mode.
tern
Note
❒ You can edit the 40 preset patterns.
Reference
For changing the background pattern, see p.165 “5-11
Make/Chg. Pattern”.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
6. Administrator Mode
❖ User Codes
If user codes are turned on, operators must enter their user codes before they can operate
the machine. The machine keeps count of the number of copies made under each user code.
Turn this function on with the “Set User Code(s)” user tool. You can also turn on Key Op-
erator Code mode so that only the key operator (administrator) can use the functions below.
1
2
Check Counter
Reset Counters
You can check the number of masters and copies made under
each user code.
Reference
For checking the number of masters and copies, see p.166
“6-1 Check Counter”.
You can clear each or all user code counters.
4
Note
❒ Default: Single
Reference
2 Reset Counters”.
3
Set User Code
Selects User Code mode. For details about User Code mode, see
Enter the key Operator Code if you have already set it. See
p.153 “6. Administrator Mode”.
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
4
5
Reg. User Code
Chg. User Code
You can register user codes.
Note
❒ Up to 20 user codes (up to 4 digits) can be registered.
You can change user codes.
Note
❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added to
that made under the new user code.
Reference
For changing the user codes, see p.168 “6-5 Chg. User
Code”.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
6
Del. User Code
You can delete user codes.
Note
❒ The number of copies made under the deleted code is also
deleted.
Reference
For deleting user codes, see p.168 “6-6 Del. User Code”.
7
Key Operator Code Use to turn Key Operator Code mode on or off.
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
8
9
Reg/Chg Key-
OpCode
You can register or change key operator codes. (up to 4 digits)
Restrict. Access
making prints. (To turn on Key Counter mode, contact your
service representative.) If Key Counter mode is on, Restricted
Access is turned on (“To use”) automatically. If you turn Re-
4
Note
❒ Default: Not to use
7. On Line Mode
No.
1
Mode
Description
Set aut-O/L def
Specifies whether Auto On Line mode is set to “On” or “Off”
when power is switched on or after mode settings are cleared.
Note
❒ Default: On
2
3
4
Ppr. Size [Online]
List/Test Print
Print PS Errors
Specifies the paper size when you press the {On Line} key.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
Prints the current set content of this machine.
Note
❒ Default: System Print
Setting for when printing the PS Error List when a PostScript er-
ror occurs.
Note
❒ Default: Off
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools Menu
5
IP Address
Sets the IP Address.
Note
❒ Default: 011.022.033.044
Reference
See the Printer Reference 1 for information about the IP Ad-
dress setting.
6
7
Ethernet Speed
Network
Sets the Ethernet communication speed.
Note
❒ Default: Auto
Sets the Network boot.
Note
❒ Default: NONE
Reference
See the Printer Reference 1 for information about the Net-
8
I/O Timeout
Sets the time to enable the interface after data stops being re-
ceived. When the time set here is exceeded, it will be possible to
receive data from the other interface.
Important
❒ If the set time is too short, a time out might occur while one
data is being received. As a result, data from another inter-
face might cut in and be printed, or the emulation retrieval
from half of the data may be activated, and be replaced with
a different emulation.
Note
❒ Default: 30 sec.
9
I/O Buffer
Sets the capacity of the reception buffer.
Note
❒ Default: 512KB
10
Menu Reset
“Network”, and the “Ethernet Speed” settings do not change.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
User Tool Menus in Detail
E Press the {q} key.
1-6 Time Setting
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
4
F Enter the month with the number
ZDZS110N
keys.
G Press the {q} key.
B Make sure that “1” is selected,
and then press the [OK] key.
Note
❒ Follow steps F and G for the
"date", "hour", "minute", and
"second".
H Press the [OK] key.
3-4 Reproduction Ratio
C Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
D Enter the year with the number
Auto On Line
Make-Up
keys.
ZDZS110N
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
B Enter 3 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
3-5 Class Enter No.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
C Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
4
B Enter 3 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
D Select the ratio you want to adjust
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
C Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
E Press the [Adjust.] key.
F Enter the desired ratio with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
D Select the grade with the [←] [→]
Note
or {~} {}} keys.
❒ You can also enter the ratio with
the number keys.
G Press the [OK] key twice.
E Press the [Enter] key.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
F Select the class with the [←] [→]
3-11 Margin Erase Area
or {~} {}} keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
G Enter the number of students
with the number keys, and then
press the {q} key.
ZDZS110N
4
B Enter 3 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
C Enter 11 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Note
❒ Repeat steps F and G until you
have finished registering the
number of students in each
class.
H Press the [OK] key.
D Select the original size you will
use with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Note
❒ Repeat steps D through H until
you have finished registering
the number of students in each
class for the each grades.
I Press the [OK] key.
E Press the [Select] key.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
F Adjust the erase edge margin.
4-11 No. of Skip Feed
If you selected A3 to A6 or 11" ×
The following procedure explains
how to change the number of drum
rotations.
17" to 51/2" × 81/2"
A Adjust the erase edge margin
with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
4
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
Note
B Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
❒ You can also enter the ratio
with the number keys and
the {q} key.
If you selected p
A Enter the erase edge margin
with the number keys.
C Enter 11 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
B Press the {q} key.
C Enter the vertical length with
the number keys.
D Press the [Change] key.
D Press the {q} key.
E Enter the horizontal width
with the number keys.
F Press the {q} key.
G Press the [OK] key twice.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
E Change the number of drum rota- A Press the {User Tools} key.
tions while one sheet of paper is
fed with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
B Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Note
4
❒ You can also change the num-
ber of rotations with the num-
ber keys.
F Press the [OK] key.
C Enter 14 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
4-14 No. of Q.start
Note
❒ The default settings are as follows.
Time
period
D Select the temperature at which
you use this machine with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
*1
Low Tmp.
0
0
0
7
5
5
7
5
5
7
5
5
*2
Normal Tmp.
*3
High Tmp.
*1
*2
*3
(10 – 15°C, 50 – 59°F)
(15 – 28°C, 59 – 82.4°F)
(28 – 30°C, 82.4 – 86°F)
E Press the [OK] key.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
F Select the time period (hours) the B Enter 4 with the number keys,
drum unit idles for with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
C Enter 19 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
G Press the [OK] key.
H Select the number of drum rota-
tions with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
4
D Select [User1] or [User2] with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
I Press the [OK] key.
E Press the [OK] key.
4-19 Type of Paper
F Select the paper type and misfeed
condition with the [←] or [→] key.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
G Press the [OK] key.
ZDZS110N
H Press the [Cancel] key.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
Stamp
positions
Default
Available
settings
5-4 Stamp Position
a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –
Note
52mm, –
2.08" – 2.08"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b
❒ The default position and available
settings of each stamp are as fol-
lows.
a
c
b = 8 –
c = center
GRSPOS6E
144mm,
line
0.32" – 5.76"
Stamp
positions
Default
Available
settings
a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –
52mm, –
2.08" – 2.08"
b = 0mm, 0"
a
c
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
c = center
line
a
b
b = – 72 –
72mm, –
b
b = 24mm,
0.96"
GRSPOS7E
b = 8 –
144mm,
0.32" – 5.76"
2.88" – 2.88"
GPSPOS0E
a = 0mm, 0" a = – 52 –
4
52mm, –
2.08" – 2.08"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
b
c
a
a
b = 8 –
144mm,
0.32" – 5.76"
c = center
line
GRSPOS8E
b = 0mm, 0"
b
b = – 72 –
72mm, –
2.88" – 2.88"
c
c = center
line
GRSPOS1E
A Press the {User Tools} key.
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
a
b
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b = 8 –
144mm,
0.32" – 5.76"
GRSPOS2E
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
Auto On Line
Make-Up
0.32" – 4.16"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b
ZDZS110N
b = 8 –
144mm,
a
GRSPOS3E
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
c
b
b = 0mm, 0"
b = – 72 –
72mm, –
2.88" – 2.88"
c = center
line
a
GRSPOS4E
a = 24mm,
0.96"
a = 8 –
104mm,
0.32" – 4.16"
b = 24mm,
0.96"
b
b = 8 –
144mm,
a
GRSPOS5E
0.32" – 5.76"
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
C Enter 4 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
5-7 Position (Date)
Note
❒ The default position and available
settings of each date stamp are as
follows.
Stamp po- Default
sitions
Available
settings
D Select the stamp position you
want with the [←] [→] or {~} {}}
keys.
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
a
dd.mm.yy
b
b = 20mm,
0.80"
b = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
4
GRDPOS0E
b
dd.mm.yy
a
GRDPOS1E
E Press the [Change] key.
a = 20mm,
0.80"
F Adjust the horizontal stamp posi-
tion with the {|} or {{} key, and
then press the {}} key.
b = 12mm,
0.48"
b
a
GRDPOS2E
a = 20mm,
0.80"
a
b
b = 8mm,
0.32"
Note
❒ The value increases or decreases
GRDPOS3E
in 4mm, 0.16" steps.
G Adjust the vertical stamp position
A Press the {User Tools} key.
with the {|} or {{} key.
H Press the [OK] key twice.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
5-10 Position (Page)
Note
❒ The default position and available
settings of each page stamp are as
follows.
❖ P1 or 1/5
C Enter 7 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Stamp po- Default
sitions
Available
settings
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
a
P.1
b
b = 12mm,
0.48"
4
b = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
GRPPOS0E
D Select the date stamp position
you want to adjust with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
a = 12mm,
0.48"
a
b
b = 12mm,
0.48"
GRPPOS1E
❖ -1-
Stamp po- Default
sitions
Available
settings
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
E Press the [Change] key.
–1–
a
F Adjust the horizontal date stamp
position with the {|} or {{} key,
and then press the {}} key.
GRPPOS2E
a = 8mm,
0.32"
a = 8 –
40mm,0.32"
– 1.60"
a
GRPPOS3E
Note
❒ The value increases or decreases
in 4mm, 0.16" steps.
G Adjust the vertical date stamp po-
sition with the {|} or {{} key.
H Press the [OK] key twice.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
A Press the {User Tools} key.
F Adjust the horizontal page num-
bering position with the {|} or
{{} key, and then press the {}}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
Note
ZDZS110N
❒ The value increases or decreases
in 4mm, 0.16" increments.
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
G Adjust the vertical page number-
ing position with the {|} or {{}
key.
4
Note
❒ You need not follow step G
when you select “-1-” as the di-
rection in step D.
C Enter 10 with the number keys.
Then press the [OK] or {q} key.
H Press the [OK] key twice.
5-11 Make/Chg. Pattern
A Press the {User Tools} key.
D Select the page numbering direc-
tion you want to adjust with the
[←] [→] or {~} {}} keys.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
B Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
E Press the [Change] key.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
C Enter 11 with the number keys, H Press the [OK] key twice.
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
6-1 Check Counter
A Press the {User Tools} key.
D Select the background pattern
with the {~}, {}}, {|}, or {{}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
4
ZDZS110N
E Press the [Change] key.
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
F Move the cursor to the position
you wish to edit with the {~},
{}}, {|}, or {{} keys.
C Make sure that 1 is selected, and
then press the [OK] key.
G Press the {q} or {Clear/Stop} key
to edit the pattern.
Note
❒ The number of masters and
prints made under the first user
code will be displayed in the
panel display.
Note
❒ To add a dot, press the {q}
key.
❒ To remove a dot, press the
{Clear/Stop} key.
❒ Repeat steps F and G until you
have finished editing the pat-
tern.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tool Menus in Detail
D Keep pressing the [→] or {}} key C Enter 2 with the number keys,
to display the number of masters
and prints made under your user
code.
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
D Select [Single] or [All] with the [←]
[→] or {~} {}} keys.
E Press the [OK] key after checking
the number of masters and prints
made under your user code.
4
6-2 Reset Counters
E Press the [OK] key.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
If you selected [Single]
A Keep pressing the [→] or {}}
key to display the number of
masters and prints made under
your user code.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
B Press the [OK] key.
C Press the [Yes] key.
D Press the [Cancel] key twice.
If you selected [All]
A Press the [Yes] key.
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Tools
F Enter the new user code with the
6-5 Chg. User Code
number keys.
A Press the {User Tools} key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
G Press the [OK] key.
4
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
6-6 Del. User Code
A Press the {User Tools} key.
C Enter 5 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
Image Density
Lighter
Stamp
On Line
Normal
Darker 1
Darker 2
Auto On Line
Make-Up
ZDZS110N
B Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
D Keep pressing the [→] or {}} key
to display your user code.
C Enter 6 with the number keys,
and then press the [OK] or {q}
key.
E Press the [OK] key.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Troubleshooting
If Your Machine Does Not Operate as You
Want
If a malfunction or a misfeed occurs, the following messages will appear on the
panel display.
Message
Meaning
Check the original di-
rection.
The paper is not placed in the same direction as the original.
Place the original in the same direction as the paper.
If you press the {Print} key, the selected paper will be used for print-
ing.
Size of original and pa- Set a paper size that matches the reproduction ratio you have select-
per is not the same.
ed and your original.
The reproduction ratio selected by Auto Magnification mode is too
big or too small.
Note
❒ You can make prints if you press the {Print} key.
Set original.
Make prints after confirming whether there is an original on the ex-
posure glass.
Make sure that you have changed the original on the exposure glass
before pressing the {Start} key.
Max. quantity: ****
Min. quantity: ****
The number of prints exceeds the maximum print quantity.
You can change the maximum number of prints that can be made in
one operation with the user tools. See “Max. Quantity” on p.144 “2.
Set Operat'n Mode”.
The number of prints does not exceed the minimum print quantity.
You can change the minimum number of prints that can be made in
one operation with the user tools. See “Min. Quantity” on p.144 “2.
Set Operat'n Mode”.
Drum unit is not set. Set Slide in the drum until it clicks.
Drum unit.
Make sure that the drum is completely set in position.
Communication error
Turn the main switch off and on.
Turn the main switch off If the message appears again, contact your service representative.
then on
Overloaded for the de- Remove the paper from the delivery tray.
livery tray
Reference
Please remove the paper
See “Delivery Capacity” on p.144 “2. Set Operat'n Mode”.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Message
Meaning
Print image is larger
The master image previously printed is larger than the paper, the
than the selected paper image exceeds the paper size.
size.
Make prints again after pressing the [Exit] key and selecting the pa-
Change the paper size.
per size again.
Note
❒ If you press the [Exit] key to erase the message and press the
{Print} key, the machine starts to make the prints. However, the
image might not fit on the paper.
-When a service call message is shown on the panel display
Press the [Exit] key. Then turn the main switch off and back on again. If a service
code appears again, contact your service representative.
Note
5
❒ If a service code appears on the panel display after you turn the main switch
off and on a few times, do not continue turning it on and off. Leave the ma-
chine off.
❒ When you make masters continuously using originals with solid images,
“SC-03-03” tends to appear on the panel display. In this case, turn off the main
switch and wait for a while. Then turn on the main switch.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Cannot Make Prints as You Want
If You Cannot Make Prints as You Want
Problem
Cause
Action
Misfeeds occur frequently.
Improper paper type is select- Select proper paper type. See
ed.
p.43 “Printing onto Various
Kinds of Paper”.
When you try to set several
functions at a time, you can-
not set some functions.
Some functions cannot be
used together.
See p.137 “Combination
Chart”.
Parts of the image are not
printed in Edge Erase mode.
Erase margin is too wide.
Set a narrower erase margin
with the user tools. See p.158
“3-11 Margin Erase Area”.
Edge margins of original are
too narrow.
Prints are blank or parts of the The paper feed side plates are Make sure that the paper feed
image are not printed.
not set correctly.
side plates touch the paper
lightly and the proper paper
size is displayed in the panel
display.
5
2nd printing with another
drum is unsatisfactory.
The 1st print image is still wet. Wait until the 1st image be-
comes dry.
An uneven solid image ap-
pears.
Large solid image wrinkles
the master.
Increase the print speed or se-
lect photo mode.
“Double feed detect at out-
The reverse or the face of
Set to “Off” of the “Double
put” is displayed frequently. printed paper is printed again. Feed Warng” with the user
tools.
Combine Originals Mode
Problem
Cause
Action
Prints are blank or parts of the Original size and direction are You cannot use originals of
image are not printed.
not correct.
different sizes and directions
in Combine Originals mode.
Use originals of same size and
direction.
Print image is not correct.
Original set order is not cor-
rect.
Place originals face up in the
optional document feeder.
The first original should be on
Place original face down on
the exposure glass. The first
original should be set first.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Loading Paper
The Load Paper indicator (B) lights
when the paper feed tray runs out of
paper.
C Adjust the paper feed side plates
to match the paper size.
Limitation
❒ Load paper when the paper feed
tray is completely empty. If you
add paper when some paper is left
in the tray, it may cause multiple
feeds or misfeeds.
Reference
ZDCY030E
For available paper sizes, see p.11
“Print Paper”.
D Push the lock lever for the paper
feed side plates down to lock the
side plates into position.
A Raise the lock lever for the paper
feed side plates to release the
lock.
5
ZDCY041E
ZDCY061E
Note
❒ Make sure that the paper size
and direction shown on the
panel display match the size
and direction of paper loaded in
the paper feed tray.
B Load the paper in the paper feed
tray.
ZDCY020E
Note
❒ Correct any paper curl before
loading the paper.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
x Clearing Misfeeds
R CAUTION:
• Be careful not to cut yourself on
any sharp edges when you reach
inside the machine to remove
misfed sheets of paper or mas-
ters.
Check the following before restarting
the printing run.
per type with the [Ppr.Type] key?
Note
❒ After clearing misfeeds, make sure
that all the doors, covers, and units
are closed and the x indicator is
off.
❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave
any torn scraps of paper, originals,
or masters in the machine.
5
❒ When clearing misfeeds, do not
turn off the main switch. If you do,
your print settings will be cleared.
• Are the side pads in the correct po-
sitions?
❒ If misfeeds occur repeatedly,
please contact your service repre-
sentative.
”x + A” Paper Misfeeds in the
Paper Feed Section
ZDCY140E
A Remove the misfed paper.
To print on thin paper (47.1g/m2,
12.5 lb), slide the levers behind the
paper feed side plates in the direc-
tion of the arrow (see illustration).
• When paper is curled, correct as
shown.
Z066
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
• When paper edges stick together
or paper is not fed in, fan the paper
as shown.
”x + A + B” Paper Misfeeds in
the Paper Feed Section
A Open the front door.
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
B1
Z067
• When printing onto postcards or
thick paper, lower the printing
speed to setting 1 or 2. See p.27
“Changing the Printing Speed”.
C Take out the drum.
5
B2
B3
B2
• When a multiple feed occurs or the
paper comes out skewed, make
sure that the paper feed side plates
are properly adjusted. When you
load paper on the paper feed tray,
make sure that the paper edge
touches the back fence and paper is
placed on the proper paper size
scale. Only use paper where the
leading edge has two right angle
corners.
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit,
see p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
D Gently pull out the misfed paper
from the inside.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
E If you cannot remove the misfed C Take out the drum.
paper, remove it from the paper
feed tray.
B2
B3
B2
F Set the drum unit and close the
front door.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, see
Note
p.132 “Changing the Color
❒ For taking out the drum unit,
see p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
Drum Unit”.
5
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
D While pressing the drum lock,
grasp the edge of the master (the
white area) and peel it off.
See p.175 “”x + A” Paper Misfeeds
in the Paper Feed Section”.
”x + B” Paper or Master
Wrapped Around the Drum
E Return the drum lock to its origi-
When the master is wrapped around the
drum
nal position.
F Set the drum unit and close the
A Open the front door.
front door.
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, see
p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
B1
When paper is wrapped around the drum
A Open the front cover.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
When paper is misfed inside the machine
A Open the front cover.
B1
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
B1
C Take out the drum.
B2
C Take out the drum.
B2
B3
B2
5
B3
B2
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit,
see p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
Note
D Remove the misfed paper from
see p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
the drum.
D Remove the misfed paper from
the inside as shown in the illus-
tration.
E If you cannot find misfed paper
around the drum (as in step D),
check the pressure cylinder. Re-
move any misfed paper.
F Set the drum unit and close the
E If you cannot remove the misfed
paper, remove paper from the
pressure cylinder.
front door.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, see
p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
F Set the drum unit and close the
”x + C” Paper Misfeeds in the
Paper Exit Section
front door.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, see
p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
A Slowly, but firmly pull out the
misfed paper.
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
the following action is necessary.
• When you use curled paper, cor-
rect as shown.
-To prevent paper misfeeds:
When thin paper misfeeds in the pa-
per exit section, reduce the printing
speed with the {W}{V} {Speed} keys.
See p.27 “Changing the Printing
Speed”. If you cannot reduce the
printing speed, close the trailing edge
guides or move the end plate toward
the paper delivery tray edge.
5
Z066
• When the leading edge margin of
the original is less than 8mm, 0.32"
or there is a solid image on the
leading edge, insert the original
with the widest margin first or
make a leading edge margin by
making a copy.
”x + D” Master Misfeeds in
the Master Feed Section
A Pull out the master tray until it
stops.
C Open the master tray cover (1).
*: Less than 8mm, 0.32"
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
D Remove the master roll (2).
”x + D + B” Master Misfeeds
in the Master Feed Section
A Open the front door.
2
1
B Lower drum unit look lever (B1).
E Reset the master roll (1).
B1
Note
❒ The master roll must be posi-
tioned as shown in the illustra-
tion in step F.
C Take out the drum.
F Close the master tray cover (2).
5
B2
1
2
B3
B2
G Position the master roll so that the
edge reaches the interior of the
master holder.
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit,
see p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
D Pull out the misfed master from
H Close the master guide.
inside.
stops.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
E Set the drum unit and close the D Grasp handle (E1) and pull out
front door.
the master eject unit until it stops.
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, see
p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
E 1
”x + B + E” Master Misfeeds
in the Master Eject Section
E Pull out lever (E3) and remove the
misfed master.
A Open the front door.
B Lower drum unit lock lever (B1).
E3
5
B1
C Take out the drum.
F Return lever (E3) and the master
eject unit to their original posi-
tions.
B2
G Set the drum unit and close the
front door.
B3
B2
Note
❒ For setting the drum unit, see
p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit,
see p.132 “Changing the Color
Drum Unit”.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
A Slide out the master tray.
”x + E” Master Misfeeds in
the Master Eject Section
A Open the front door.
B Grasp handle (E1) and pull out
the master eject unit until it stops.
E 1
B Open the cover at the bottom of
the master tray while holding the
lever and remove the fragments.
C Check where the misfed master
is. Remove the misfed master.
5
D Return the master eject unit to its
original position and close the
front door.
C Close the black cover and slide in
Note
❒ Make sure that you securely
close the black cover before slid-
ing in the master tray.
-If master misfeeds occur often
If the master misfeeds often, frag-
ments of the master might be left in
the bottom of the master tray. Re-
move the fragments.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x Clearing Misfeeds
E Return the document feed sheet
Optional Document Feeder
to its original position.
F Close the document feeder (ADF)
cover until it clicks in position
and if necessary, close the docu-
ment feeder.
A Open the document feeder (ADF)
cover.
ZDCY100E
ZDCY090E
5
B Pull out the misfed original gen-
-To prevent originals
tly.
misfeeding:
Placing the following kinds of origi-
nals on the exposure glass may cause
misfeeds.
• Originals heavier than 128g/m2, 34
lb
• Originals lighter than 52g/m2, 14
lb
ZDCY120E
C If you cannot remove misfed orig-
inals as in step B, open the docu-
ment feeder.
• Originals larger than 297mm ×
864mm, 11.6" × 34.0"
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Curled, folded, or creased origi-
nals
• Originals with any kind of coating,
such as thermal fax paper, art pa-
per, aluminum foil, carbon paper,
or conductive paper
• Bound originals such as books
• Damaged originals
TPEH220E
• Originals with glue on them
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
• Pasted originals
• Originals written in pencil
• Thin originals that have low stiff-
ness
• Originals with index tabs
• Transparent originals such as OHP
transparencies or translucent pa-
per
Note
❒ Do not mix different sizes of origi-
nals in the optional document
feeder.
❒ Remove staples or paperclips from
originals. Fan originals that have
had staples or paperclips removed.
❒ Do not stack originals above the
5
limit mark.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M) Lights
When the Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M)
Lights
MMake sure that the following
doors/covers are closed.
❖ Front door
Close the front door completely.
5
❖ Optional document feeder (ADF) cov-
er
Close the document feeder (ADF)
cover until it locks in position.
ZDCY100E
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When the Add Ink Indicator (j) Lights
The Add Ink indicator (j) lights when it is time to supply ink.
R CAUTION:
• If ink comes into contact with your eyes, rinse immediately in running water.
For other symptoms, consult a doctor.
R CAUTION:
• Keep the ink or ink container out of reach of children.
R CAUTION:
• If ink is ingested, induce vomiting by drinking a strong saline solution. Con-
sult a doctor immediately.
R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies avail-
able at an authorized dealer.
5
Note
❒ Be sure to supply ink of the same color as the current drum.
❒ Ink is easily removed from skin by waterless hand cleaners followed by wash-
ing with soap and water.
❒ Be careful not to get any ink on your clothing.
❒ Store ink under low temperature and humidity conditions.
❒ Do not store ink where it will be exposed to heat or direct sunlight.
❒ Store on a flat surface.
A Open the front door.
B Pull out the ink holder.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Add Ink Indicator (j) Lights
C Remove the used ink cartridge.
D Remove the cap of the new ink cartridge.
5
E Insert the new cartridge into the ink holder.
Note
❒ Always supply ink of the same color.
F Return the ink holder to its original position until it clicks.
G Close the front door.
The machine will start idling to supply ink to the drum.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When the Master End Indicator (C) Lights
The Master End indicator (C) lights when it is time to replace the master roll or
when you need to set the master roll.
R CAUTION:
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and function-
ality, and we recommend that you use only the expendable supplies avail-
able at an authorized dealer.
A Pull out the master tray until it stops.
B Open the master guide.
5
C Open the master tray cover (1).
D Remove the used master roll (2).
2
1
Note
❒ When the Master End indicator is lit, it is necessary to replace the master
roll even if some master remains on the old roll.
E The new master roll must be positioned as shown in the illustration (1).
F Close the master tray cover (2).
1
2
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Master End Indicator (C) Lights
G Position the master roll so that the edge reaches the interior of the master
holder.
H Close the master guide.
5
I Push in the master feed unit until it stops.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When the Master Eject Indicator (k) Lights
The Master Eject indicator (k) lights
F Remove the used master by push-
when it is time to empty the master
ing down the handle (1) towards
eject unit or when you need to set the
the waste container (2).
master eject unit.
Note
❒ Ink is easily removed from skin by
waterless hand cleaners followed
by washing with soap and water.
❒ Be careful not to get any ink on
your clothing while emptying the
master eject unit.
Note
❒ If you cannot remove the used
master completely, repeat step
F until all the master is re-
moved.
A Prepare a container for the used
master.
5
B Open the front door.
G Reinstall the master eject unit,
making sure it clicks into posi-
tion.
C Use handle (E1) to pull out the
master eject unit until it stops.
H Close the front cover.
E1
D Pull up handle (E2) and pull out
the master eject unit completely.
1
E
2
E 1
2
E Hold the master eject unit upper
handle and turn it clockwise with
one hand while holding handle
(E1) with other hand (1).
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Other Indicators Are Lit
When Other Indicators Are Lit
Indicator
Meaning and action
The key counter (option) is not set. Insert the key counter.
TPES270E
•
•
(Metric version)
Color drum unit is installed.
A3 A4
TPES280E
(Inch version)
m
81/2 Color
TPES280N
•
•
(Metric version)
A3/11" × 17" drum unit is set.
A3 A4
TPES290E
5
(Inch version)
Drum
17 81/2 Co
TPES290N
A4/81/2" × 11" drum unit is set.
•
•
(Metric version)
A3 A4
TPES300E
(Inch version)
Drum
17 81/2 Co
TPES300N
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
When Prints Are Not Delivered in a Neat
Stack
B Re-adjust the paper feed side
When Printing on Small Size
plates so that there is no space be-
Paper
tween the side plates and the pa-
per, and then lock the side plates
in position.
A Adjust the angle of the end plate
by turning the screw clockwise or
counterclockwise.
5
ZDCY030E
Note
ZDCH150E
❒ Make sure that the paper size
and direction in the panel dis-
play match the actual paper size
and direction of the paper on
the feed tray.
When the Machine Cannot
Detect the Paper Size
❒ If the paper on the paper feed
tray has a solid image on its
back side, the machine may not
be able to detect the size correct-
ly. Place a sheet of paper of the
same size without an image on
the back at the bottom of the pa-
per stack.
If the paper size is not detected cor-
rectly when printing, prints might not
be delivered in a neat stack. To solve
this, do one of the following:
A Raise the lock lever for the paper
feed side plates to release the
lock.
ZDCY111E
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Poor Printing
Poor Printing
Dirty Background
If the background of prints is dirty, the drum unit might be dirty.
R CAUTION:
• If ink comes into contact with your eyes, rinse immediately in running water.
For other symptoms, consult a doctor.
R CAUTION:
• Keep the ink or ink container out of reach of children.
R CAUTION:
• If ink is ingested, induce vomiting by drinking a strong saline solution. Con-
sult a doctor immediately.
5
Note
❒ To avoid getting dirty background prints when printing onto paper smaller
than the original image, select a suitable reduction ratio or use larger print pa-
per.
❒ When printing onto paper that does not absorb ink well, like postcards, the
background of prints might be dirty. In this case, lower the printing speed or
use Skip Feed mode to dry the ink on the prints.
A Turn off the main switch.
TPEH020E
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
B Pull out the drum unit.
TPEH101E
Note
❒ For taking out the drum unit, see p.132 “Changing the Color Drum Unit”.
C While pressing the drum lock, turn the drum until you can see the trailing
edge of the master.
5
D With a dry soft cloth, remove any ink that has accumulated on the trailing
edge of the drum unit.
Important
❒ Do not use benzine, thinner, or other organic liquids—doing so can dam-
age the machine.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Black Lines/Stained Prints
Check the platen cover and clean it if dirty. See p.201 “Cleaning the platen cov-
er”.
Check the exposure glass and clean it if dirty. See p.201 “Cleaning the exposure
glass”.
Check the sheet of the optional document feeder and clean it if dirty. See p.202
“Cleaning the Sheet”.
Note
❒ If black lines or stains still appear on prints even following the cleaning pro-
cedures above, please contact your service representative.
Faint Prints
If the machine is not used for a long period of time or you change the color drum
unit, the ink on the drum might dry causing print quality to deteriorate. To solve
this problem, use Quality Start mode. See p.77 “Quality Start Mode”.
5
If the print density is still too light even if you use Quality Start mode, remake
the master.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remarks
Do's and Don'ts
R CAUTION:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine.
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
be damaged under the machine.
Important
❒ Make sure that the m indicator on the PC controller operation panel is off be-
fore unplugging the power cord.
• While printing, do not turn off the main switch.
• While printing, do not unplug the power cord.
• While printing, do not open the door or covers.
• While printing, do not move the machine.
• Open and close all doors and covers carefully.
• When printing onto paper that contains images on the back, make sure there
is a 10mm (0.4") margin at the back leading edge. If there is no margin, the ma-
chine might wrongly detect that paper is wrapped around the drum and stop
printing.
• When you use envelopes or pasted print paper, the leading edge of the prints
might be damaged.
• Always make a few trial prints to check the image position because the image
position of the trial print might not correspond with that of the original.
• The leading edge of the prints might become stained if the edge touches the
image of prints on the paper delivery tray.
• Print ink on the paper delivery tray might stick to the back side of the next
print.
• Press the {Proof} key to perform a test print as the image density of the first
few prints might be light.
• When the machine is on and the power source is less than 90% of the specified
amount, printing quality will decrease. Therefore, make sure the supply from
your electrical outlet is at least 90% of the required amount.
• When you make a lot of prints from a small image, ink might ooze out from
the edges of the master, especially in high temperatures and when printing in
two or more colors. In these cases, make a new master.
• Remove the paper from the tray before relocating the machine. If you relocate
the machine leaving the paper on the tray, reset the paper after the relocation.
If the main switch of the machine is turned on without resetting the paper cor-
rectly, the sensor might be broken.
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarks
wrinkled. If this paper is used, wrinkles may also appear on the master. If the
paper or other protective covering.
solid color, when the printing speed is set to 1. If this occurs, print the image
with the printing speed set to 3.
• If there are fine lines within 5mm to 10mm, 0.2" to 0.4" of the edge of the im-
age, shadowing may occur.
• Depending on the type of paper being used, speckles may appear within
5mm to 10mm, 0.2" to 0.4" of the edge of the image at around 1000 prints.
• When two or more sheets of paper feed at once, you can select whether the
warning message is displayed or not. Set to “On” of the “Double Feed
• When two or more sheets of paper feed at once, set paper on the paper feed
side plates securely. See p.15 “Printing Preparations”.
• When paper misfeeds occur, select the proper paper type from [Ppr.Type]. See
p.43 “Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper”. If the problem persists, fan or
turn the paper over.
6
• If the paper skews, make sure to set the paper feed side plates securely. See
p.15 “Printing Preparations”.
• Make sure originals on the exposure glass are correctly positioned and
aligned with the scale.
• If the edges of the paper are rounded, skewing might occur. Change the pa-
per's orientation or replace.
• If the paper becomes creased, make sure the correct paper type has been se-
lected [Ppr.Type]. See p.43 “Printing onto Various Kinds of Paper”.
• If non-standard papers crease frequently, use the standard paper type.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put Your Machine
Where to Put Your Machine
Environment
Your machine's location should be carefully chosen because environmental con-
ditions greatly affect its performance.
Optimum environmental conditions
R CAUTION:
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an elec-
tric shock might occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over,
an injury might occur.
R CAUTION:
• If you use the machine in a confined space, make sure there is a continuous
air turnover.
6
R CAUTION:
• After you move the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Other-
wise the machine might move or come down to cause an injury.
• Temperature: 10 – 30°C, 50 – 86°F
• Humidity: 20 – 90% RH
• A strong and level floor.
• The machine must be level within 5mm, 0.2" both front to rear and left to
right.
Environments to avoid
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight or strong light (more than 1500 lux).
• Locations directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner or heated air
from a heater (sudden temperature changes might cause condensation within
the machine).
• Places where the machine might be subjected to frequent strong vibration.
• Dusty areas.
• Areas with corrosive gases.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarks
Power Connection
R WARNING:
• Connect the machine only to the power source described on the inside
front cover of this manual. Connect the power cord directly into a wall
outlet and do not use an extension cord.
• Do not damage, break or make any modifications to the power cord.
Do not place heavy objects on it. Do not pull it hard nor bend it more
R CAUTION:
While moving the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not
R CAUTION:
plug (not the cable).
Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
6
Machine Clearance
Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
❖ Main frame
* Paper delivery tray
1. More than 10cm, 4.0"
2. More than 60cm, 23.7"
3. More than 60cm, 23.7"
4. More than 60cm, 23.7"
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining Your Machine
Maintaining Your Machine
To maintain high print quality, clean
the following parts and units regular-
ly.
Cleaning the platen cover
A Lift the platen cover.
❖ Cleaning the machine
B Clean the platen cover with a
damp cloth and wipe it with a dry
cloth.
Wipe the machine with a soft,
damp cloth. Then wipe it with a
dry cloth to remove the water.
Important
❒ Do not use chemical cleaner or or-
ganic solvents, such as thinner or
benzene. If they get into the ma-
chine or melt plastic parts, a failure
might occur.
❒ Do not clean parts other than those
specified in this manual. Such
parts should be cleaned by your
service representative.
AM1P0100
6
Note
❒ If you do not clean the platen
cover, marks on the cover will
be printed.
Cleaning the Main Frame
Cleaning the paper feed roller (Paper
feed tray)
Cleaning the exposure glass
A Lift the platen cover or document
A Wipe dust off the paper feed roll-
er with a damp cloth, and then
wipe it with a dry cloth.
feeder.
B Clean A and B.
TPEH120E
ZDCH130E
Note
❒ If you do not clean the paper
feed roller, paper misfeeds tend
to occur.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarks
Cleaning the Optional
Document Feeder
Cleaning the Sheet
A Lift the document feeder.
B Clean the sheet with a damp cloth
and wipe it with a dry cloth.
AM1D600
6
Note
❒ If you do not clean the sheet,
marks on the sheet will be print-
ed.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Specifications
Main Frame
❖ Configuration:
Floor standing (with custom table or cabinet).
❖ Printing Process:
Full automatic one drum system
❖ Original Type:
Sheet/Book
❖ Original Size:
Maximum 305mm × 432mm, 12.0" × 17.0"
❖ Pixel Density:
600dpi
❖ Image Mode:
Photo mode
Letter mode
Letter/Photo mode
Pencil mode
Tint mode
❖ Reduction Ratios:
• Inch version:
93%, 77%, 74%, 65%
• Metric version:
93%, 87%, 82%, 71%
❖ Enlargement Ratios:
• Inch version:
155%, 129%, 121%
• Metric version:
141%, 122%, 115%
❖ Zoom:
From 50% to 200% in 1% steps
❖ Directional Magnification:
• Vertical:
From 50% to 200% in 1% steps
• Horizontal:
From 50% to 200% in 1% steps
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
❖ Printing Area:
• A3 drum:
• Inch version: More than 290 × 420mm, 11.4" × 16.5"
• Metric version: More than 290mm × 410mm, 11.4" × 16.1"
• A4 drum:
More than 290mm × 200mm, 11.4" × 7.8"
❖ Print Paper Size:
Maximum recommended: 297mm × 432mm, 11.6" × 17.0" (Maximum: 320mm
× 447mm, 12.6" × 17.6")
Minimum: 70mm × 148mm, 2.8" × 5.8"
❖ Leading Edge Margin:
Less than 8mm, 0.32"
❖ Print Paper Weight:
• 47.1 – 209.3g/m2, 12.5 – 55.6 lb
❖ Print Speed:
60 – 120rpm (5 steps)
❖ First Copy Time (Master Process Time):
Less than 31 seconds (A3, 11" × 17"L)
Less than 25 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11"K)
7
❖ Second Copy Time (First Print Time):
Less than 32 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")
Less than 26.5 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11")
❖ Color Printing:
Drum unit replacement system
❖ Image Position:
• Vertical:
• Inch version: 10mm, 0.4"
• Metric version: 15mm, 0.6"
• Side:
10mm, 0.4" (for either side)
❖ Paper Size and Paper Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Paper Delivery Tray Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Main Frame
❖ Master Eject Unit Capacity:
• A3 drum
More than 70 masters
• A4 drum
100 masters
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H)
Width
Depth
Height
Stored
730mm, 28.8"
700mm, 27.6"
700mm, 27.6"
585mm, 23"
Stored with docu-
ment feeder
730mm, 28.8"
695mm, 27.4"
Set up
1435mm, 56.5"
1435mm, 56.5"
1435mm, 56.5"
700mm, 27.6"
700mm, 27.6"
700mm, 27.6"
585mm, 23"
Set up with cabinet
1,020mm, 40.2"
1,130mm, 44.5"
Set up with cabinet
anddocument feeder
(when you use A3,
11" × 17" or larger pa-
per)
❖ Weight:
• Machine:
Less than 105kg, 231.5 lb
❖ Noise Emission *1
7
Sound power level
Mainframe only
Stand-by
--
During printing
120cpm
Sound pressure level *2
Mainframe only
Stand-by
During printing
*1
--
120cpm
The above measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779 are actual value.
It is measured at the position of the operator.
*2
❖ Power Consumption:
• Making a master:
Less than 0.26kW
• Printing:
Less than 0.25kW
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
❖ Optional Equipment:
• Drum unit: Color Drums
Type 80(L) A3, 11" × 17"
Type 80(S) A4, 81/2" × 11"
• Key Counter
• Document Feeder
• PC Controller
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
7
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Document Feeder (Option)
Document Feeder (Option)
❖ Original Type:
Sheet
❖ Original Weight:
52.3g/m2 to 127.9g/m2, 13.9 lb to 34 lb
❖ Original Size:
Max. 297mm × 864mm, 11.7" × 34.0"
Min. 149mm × 210mm, 5.9" × 8.3"
❖ First Copy Time (Master Process Time):
Less than 34 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")
Less than 28.5 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11")
❖ Second Copy Time (First Print Time):
Less than 35 seconds (A3, 11" × 17")
Less than 30 seconds (A4, 81/2" × 11")
❖ Original Capacity:
7.5mm, 0.3" height
7
Color Drum Type 80(L) A3, 11" × 17"
(Option)
Color Drum Type 80(S) A4, 81/2" × 11"
(Option)
Exposure Glass Cover (Option)
Printer Unit Type 80 RCP80 (Option)
Interface Cable Type 85 (Option)
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Twin Color Press Roller Printing System TC-II (Option)
Twin Color Press Roller Printing System TC-II
(Option)
❖ Configuration:
Floor standing (with custom table or cabinet)
❖ Printing Process:
Twin color press roller printing system
❖ Print Paper Size:
Maximum: 297mm × 432mm, 11.6" × 17.0"
Minimum: 70mm × 250mm, 2.8" × 9.8"
❖ Print Paper Weight:
• 52.3 – 209.3g/m2, 13.9 – 55.6 lb
❖ Print Speed:
90–120cpm (3 steps)
❖ Color Printing:
Drum unit replacement system
❖ Paper Size and Paper Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
7
❖ Paper Delivery Tray Capacity:
1,000 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb)
❖ Dimensions (W × D × H)
Width
Depth
Height
Stored
Set up
920 mm, 36.2"
1,610 mm, 63.4"
630 mm, 24.8"
630 mm, 24.8"
555 mm, 21.9"
555 mm, 21.9"
❖ Weight:
• Machine:
Less than 88kg, 194 lb
❖ Power Consumption:
• Printing:
0.55kW(Max)
❖ Optional Equipment:
• Drum unit: color Drums
A3, 11" × 17"
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Consumables
Name
Size
Remarks
Master:
Length: 140m, 520ft/roll
Width: 320mm, 12.6" 2 Rolls/case
A3 drum
More than 255 masters can be made
per roll
A4 drum
410 masters can be made per roll
Ink-Black
1,000ml/pack
1,000ml/pack
Environmental conditions: -5 to
40°C 10 – 95% RH
Ink-Red
Ink-Blue
Ink-Green
Ink-Brown
Ink-Purple
Ink-Yellow
Ink-Navy
Ink-Maroon
Ink-Teal
Ink-Orange
Ink-Gray
Ink-Violet
Ink-Hunter green
Ink-Burgundy
Ink-Gold
7
High Density Ink-
Black
High Density Ink-
Blue
High Density Ink-
Green
High Density Ink-
Reflex Blue
High Density Ink-
Red
High Density Ink-
Navy
High Density Ink-
Teal
Note
❒ Specifications are subject to change without notice.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
{~}{}}{|}{{}, 6
C
Cancel, 8
Cancel Comb., 148
16 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided
print of 16 images, 118
1 single-sided original → 1 single-sided
print of 2 images, 69
1 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided
print of 4 images, 69
2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided
print with 2 images, 64
2 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided
print with 4 images, 64
4 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided
print of 4 images, 118
8 single-sided originals → 1 single-sided
print of 8 images, 118
changing the printing speed, 27
Check Counter, 153, 166
Chg. User Code, 153, 168
Class Enter No., 145, 157
{Class} key, 6
Class Manual Set, 146
Class mode, 62
clearing misfeeds, 175
{Clear Modes/Energy Saver} key, 6
{Clear/Stop} key, 6
closed area method, 94
color drum, 132, 191
color drum indicator, 7
color printing, 132
combination chart, 137
Combine, 147
A
{Combine} key, 5
A3/11" × 17" drum indicator, 7
A3/11" × 17" drum unit, 191
A4/81/2" × 11" drum indicator, 7
A4/81/2" × 11" drum unit, 191
accessing the user tools, 141
Add Ink Indicator (j), 186
adjusting the image density of prints, 25
adjusting the position of printed images,
24
Administrator Mode, 153
All Class mode, 52
Auto Class, 149
Auto Class mode, 54
Auto Combine mode, 69
Auto Cycle, 51
combine originals, 64
Combine printing, 129
Comb. Sep. Line, 147
command sheet, 90
consumables, 210
CopyCount Display, 144
counter, 7
D
Data In indicator (Green), 7
Data Print, 144
Date Position Set, 151
Date Stamp, 111
Date Style Set, 151
Deflector Angle, 149
Del. User Code, 154, 168
diagonal line method, 92
Directional Magnification (%), 36
Directional Magnification (Size), 38
Direction(Page), 152
dirty background, 193
document feeder (ADF), 4
Double Feed, 82
{Auto Cycle} key, 6
Auto Cycle ON/OFF, 146
Auto Magnification, 31
{Auto On Line} key, 5
Auto Quality Start, 77
Auto Reset, 143
Auto Rotation, 150
Auto Separate, 149
B
drum size, 136
drum unit, 3
drum unit handle B2, 133
drum unit lock lever B1, 3
Background ON/OFF, 147
background patterns, 89
black line/stain, 196
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
L
Eco.Mode ON/OFF, 146
Language on LCD, 143
LCD Contrast, 144
Letter mode, 46
Letter/Photo mode printing, 46
Economy mode, 50
{Economy Mode} key, 5
Edge Erase, 41
{Edge Erase} key, 5
Energy Saver mode, 22
Energy Saving, 144
envelopes, 44
List/Test Print, 154
Loading Paper, 15
loading paper, 174
Load Paper indicator (B), 174
environment, 199
Longer Paper, 147
erasing center and edge margins, 40
Error indicator (Red), 7
Ethernet Speed, 155
Exit, 8
LT/Photo Contrast, 145
LT/Photo Priority, 145
M
exposure glass, 3
Exposure glass cover, 3
machine clearance, 200
machine exterior, 1
machine interior, 2
main switch, 2
F
flip up cover, 1
Format, 108
front door, 1
maintaining your machine, 201
Make/Chg. Pattern, 152, 165
{Make-Up} key, 5
Make-up printing, 97
Make-up printing features, 86
Make-up samples, 100
Manual Class mode with One Original, 57
Manual Class mode with two or more
originals, 59, 130
H
handle E1, 2
I
Manual Quality Start, 77
master, 188, 210
Master Eject indicator (k), 190
Master End Indicator (C), 188
Master length, 81, 150
master misfeeds in the master eject
section, 181, 182
master misfeeds in the master feed
section, 179, 180
master tray, 1
Idling for Q.start, 148
Ignore Paper Size, 146
{Image Density} key, 5
Image Overlay, 108
Image Rotation, 85
indicators, 7
Initial Setting, 145
ink, 186, 210
ink holder, 3
Ink/Master Left, 149
I/O Buffer, 155
I/O Timeout, 155
IP Address, 155
Max. Quantity, 144
Memory Combine, 118
Menu Reset, 155
Min. Quantity, 144
mm/inch, 143
Mode Setting, 146
J
Job Separation, 79
{Job Separator} key, 5
monitor indicators, 7
MSTR Makg. Density, 145
K
Key counter, 4, 191, 206
Key Operator Code, 154
keys, 5
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Position(Date), 151
Position(Page), 152
Prev., 8
{Print} key, 6
Print PS Errors, 154
{Program} key, 6
N
Network, 155
Next, 8
No. of Q.start, 148, 160
No. of Skip Feed, 148, 159
No Orig. Size, 147
No Orig. Size DF, 146
Number keys, 6
O
OK, 8
{On Line} key, 5
protecting a program, 74
On Line Overlay, 108
On Line printing, 83
Open Cover/Unit Indicator (M), 185
operation panel, 1, 5
optional document feeder, 127
options, 4, 206, 207
original misfeeds, 183
Original mode, 46
Original Priority, 145
originals, 13, 127
Q
{q} key, 6
Quality Start mode, 77
Overlay, 108
{Overlay} key, 5
P
Page Stamp, 113
Panel Beeper, 144
panel display, 7, 8
panel display layout, 9
paper delivery side plates, 2
paper delivery tray, 2
paper feed side plates, 1
Paper feed tray, 1
paper misfeeds in the paper feed section,
175, 176
paper or master wrapped around the
drum, 177
Paper Type, 43, 44, 45, 145
PC controller, 83, 109
Pencil mode printing, 48
Photo Contrast, 146
Photo mode printing, 47
Photo(Screen), 146
Security mode, 76
Select, 8
service call, 172
Set User Code, 153
Size, 151
{Skip Feed} key, 5
Skip Feed printing, 71
special feature indicator, 7
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
specifications, 203
Stamp, 116, 151
Stamp Density, 151
{Stamp} key, 5
standard paper, 43
standard printing, 19
{Start} key, 6
Storage Overlay, 108
storing a program, 73
System, 143
T
thick paper, 43
Tint Mode, 26
trailing edge guides, 3
troubleshooting, 171
Type, 151
Type of Paper, 149, 161
Type(Page), 152
U
user code, 18, 153
user tools, 141
{User Tools} key, 5
W
Z
Zoom, 34
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
216
UE USA C244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|